WO2024012465A1 - Developing device - Google Patents

Abstract

Provided in the present application is a developing device. The developing device comprises: a box body, which has a first end and a second end that are oppositely arranged; a developing assembly, comprising a developing roller arranged in the box body; a transmission assembly, which is arranged at the first end, wherein the transmission assembly is configured to drive the developing assembly to move after receiving power output by an image formation device; a transmission unit, wherein the transmission unit comprises a first rotating member and a transmission member, the first rotating member is rotatably arranged at the first end of the box body, the first rotating member is in transmission connection with the transmission assembly and the transmission member respectively, and a detected member is in transmission connection with the transmission member; and the detected member, which is at least partially located at the second end, wherein the detected member is in transmission connection with the transmission assembly by means of the transmission member, and the detected member can move between a detection position and a non-detection position. The transmission assembly is arranged at the first end of the box body, and the detected member is at least partially located at the second end of the box body, so that the space occupied by a transmission structure at the second end of the box body is reduced, and miniaturization of the developing device is facilitated.

Description

Developing device

This application is required to be submitted to the China Patent Office on July 11, 2022, with the application number 202221791169. A Chinese patent application with the application number 202222050794.5 and the application name "A kind of developing box" was submitted to the China Patent Office on August 15, 2022, with the application number 202222146027.4 and the application name being "a kind of developing box"; in 2022 A Chinese patent application was submitted to the China Patent Office on August 22, 2022, with the application number 202222217669.9, and the application name is "A developing device"; it was submitted to the China Patent Office on August 31, 2022, with the application number 202222316708.0, and the application name is " A Chinese patent application for "a developing device"; submitted to the China Patent Office on September 22, 2022, with the application number 202222522985.7 and the application name "Developing Device"; submitted to the China Patent Office on September 26, 2022 , a Chinese patent application with application number 202222564932.1 and the application title "A developing device"; a Chinese patent application submitted to the China Patent Office on September 28, 2022 with the application number 202222587340.1 and the application title "a developing device" ; A Chinese patent application submitted to the China Patent Office on October 14, 2022, with the application number 202222730289.5, and the application title is "a developing device"; a Chinese patent application submitted to the China Patent Office on November 17, 2022, with the application number 202223105178.1. Chinese patent application titled "A developing device"; submitted to the China Patent Office on January 6, 2023, application number 202320064347.7, Chinese patent application titled "Developing device"; submitted on January 18, 2023 A Chinese patent application with the application number 202320155353.3 and the application name "Developing Device" was filed with the China Patent Office on February 9, 2023. The Chinese patent application was submitted to the China Patent Office with the application number 202320200658.1 and the application name was "a developing device". Application; Submitted to the China Patent Office on February 24, 2023, with application number 202320334037.2, and application name "A developing cartridge and its drum assembly"; Submitted to the China Patent Office on December 8, 2022, application The priority of the Chinese patent application No. 202223298061.

Technical field

The present application relates to the field of electronic imaging technology, and in particular to a developing device.

Background technique

The developing device is a detachable part widely used in image forming devices. After the printing consumables of the image forming device are used up, a new developing device needs to be replaced. In order for the image forming device to detect whether the developing device is correct and whether the developing device is old or new, a detected part will be provided on the developing device. The detected part can touch the detecting part in the image forming device to cause the image forming device to detect Whether the developing device is installed correctly, the detected part can also be preset with different number of touches, touch speed, and duration of each touch, so that the image forming device can detect a variety of information (such as new and old, model, capacity, etc.).

Currently, the developing device is equipped with a large number of transmission structures, allowing the object to be detected to make complex touching actions. However, the large number of transmission structures makes it difficult to miniaturize the developing device.

Contents of the invention

Based on this, the present application provides a developing device to solve the problem in the prior art that the large number of transmission structures makes it difficult to miniaturize the developing device.

The developing device provided by this application includes:

A box body, the box body has a first end and a second end that are oppositely arranged in the first direction, the box body has a third end and a fourth end that are oppositely arranged in the second direction, and the box body is in The third direction has a fifth end and a sixth end arranged oppositely, and the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are arranged to intersect with each other;

The developing assembly includes a developing roller rotatably arranged in the box body, the developing roller is located at the third end of the box body, the axial direction of the developing roller extends along the first direction, and in the second direction The developing roller is located at the third end of the box body;

a transmission assembly, disposed at the first end, the transmission assembly being configured to drive the developing assembly to move after receiving power output from the image forming device;

Transmission unit. The transmission unit includes a first rotating member and a transmission member. The first rotating member is rotatably arranged at the first end of the box body. The first rotating member is connected to the transmission assembly and the transmission member respectively. The parts to be detected are drivingly connected to the transmission parts, and the detected parts are drivingly connected to the transmission parts;

The detected part is at least partially located at the second end. The detected part is transmission connected with the transmission assembly through the transmission member. The detected part can move between a detection position and a non-detection position.

The developing device provided by this application includes a box body, a developing component, a transmission component, a transmission unit and a detected part. When the transmission component receives the power output from the image forming device and drives the development component to move, the transmission component can be driven by the transmission unit. The object to be detected moves between the detection position and the non-detection position, so that the image forming device can to detect information about the developing device. The transmission assembly is arranged at the first end of the box body, and the detected component is at least partially located at the second end of the box body, which reduces the space occupied by the transmission structure at the second end of the box body and facilitates the miniaturization of the developing device.

Description of drawings

Figure 1.1 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of another developing device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.2 is a cross-sectional view of the developing device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.3 is an exploded structural diagram of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.4 is a schematic structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application being installed on the drum assembly;

Figure 1.5 is a structural schematic diagram from another perspective of the development device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application being installed on the drum assembly;

Figure 1.6 is a schematic structural diagram of the drum assembly provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.7 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of another developing device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.8 is a schematic structural diagram of the developing device shown in Figure 1.7 from another perspective;

Figure 1.9 is a cross-sectional view of the developing device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.10 is an exploded schematic diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.11 is a side view of the first end of the developing device provided by Embodiment 1 of the present application after hiding the first protective cover;

Figure 1.12 is a schematic structural diagram of the first end provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figures 1.13 and 1.14 are schematic three-dimensional structural diagrams of yet another developing device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.15 is a right view of the developing device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.16 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the second end of the second protective cover and the box body in the disassembled state provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.17 is a left view of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.18 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the second protective cover provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.19 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.20 is an exploded structural diagram of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.21 is a right view of the first end of the box after hiding the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.22 is a right view of the first end of the rear box body of the first protective cover and the power receiving device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.23 shows the first end of the rear box body after hiding the first protective cover and the power receiving device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application. Schematic diagram of three-dimensional structure;

Figure 1.24 is an exploded structural diagram of the first end of the box body after hiding the first protective cover and the power receiving device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.25 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first mounting bracket provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.26 is a schematic structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 1.27 is a schematic structural diagram of the drum assembly provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;

Figure 2 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of a developing device provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 3 is an exploded three-dimensional structural diagram of the first protective cover and the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 4 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first end of the box body of the developing device provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application with the first protective cover removed;

Figure 5 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 6 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 7 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram between the first rotating member, the translating member and the stirring frame provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 8 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first rotating component and the translating component provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 9 is a partially enlarged schematic view of the translational member provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 10 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the translational component, stirring gear, and stirring shaft provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application in an exploded state;

Figure 11 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application in an exploded state;

Figure 12 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first rotating component and the translating component when the detected component is in a non-detecting position according to Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 13 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first rotating component and the translating component when the detected component is in a non-detecting position according to Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 14 is a schematic structural diagram of the first rotating component and the translating component viewed along the first direction when the detected component is in the non-detecting position according to Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 15 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first rotating component and the translating component when the detected component is in the detection position according to Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 16 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first rotating component and the translating component when the detected component is in the detection position provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 17 is a schematic structural diagram of the first rotating component and the translating component viewed along the first direction when the detected component is in the detection position according to Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 18 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;

Figure 19 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;

Figures 20-22 are schematic exploded structural views of the right end of the developing device provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;

Figure 23 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;

Figure 24 is an exploded structural diagram of the left end of the developing device provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;

Figure 25 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the translational component, the detected component, the slider and the stirring gear provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;

Figure 26 is a schematic structural diagram of the translation member provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application when it is closest to the first protective cover;

Figure 27 is a schematic structural diagram of the translational member provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application when it is closest to the second protective cover;

Figure 28 is a schematic exploded structural view of the left end of the developing device when the detected object is in a non-detecting position according to Embodiment 3 of the present application;

Figure 29 is a schematic exploded structural diagram of the left end of the developing device when the detected object is in the detection position provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;

Figure 30 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the second protective cover, the detected part and the slider when the detected part is in a non-detecting position according to Embodiment 3 of the present application;

Figure 31 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the second protective cover, the detected part and the slider when the detected part is in the detection position according to Embodiment 3 of the present application;

Figures 32 and 33 are schematic structural diagrams of the developing device provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application;

Figure 34 is a schematic diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application after the first protective cover is removed and the swinging member is separated from the box body;

Figure 35 is an exploded schematic diagram of the transmission assembly after the first protective cover and the box body are separated according to Embodiment 4 of the present application;

Figure 36 is a side view of the stirring gear and the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application when they are connected;

Figure 37 is a top view of the developing device in the state of Figure 117 with the first protective cover removed;

Figure 38 is a side view of the stirring gear driving the first rotating member to push the swinging member to move according to Embodiment 4 of the present application;

Figure 39 is a top view of the developing device with the first protective cover removed in the state of Figure 38;

Figure 40 is a side view of the transmission protrusion on the first rotating member after it leaves the swinging member provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application;

Figure 41 is a top view of the developing device in the state of Figure 133 with the first protective cover removed;

Figure 42 is a schematic structural diagram of a developing device provided in Embodiment 5 of the present application;

Figure 43 is a structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 5 of the present application with the first protective cover removed;

Figure 44 is an exploded schematic diagram of the transmission assembly after the first protective cover and the box body are separated according to Embodiment 5 of the present application;

Figure 45 is a schematic diagram of the translational member and the box body provided in Embodiment 5 of the present application after separation;

Figure 46 is an exploded view of the developing device provided in Embodiment 5 of the present application located at the second end of the box;

Figure 47 is a schematic structural diagram of the detected part, the transmission unit and the stirring gear provided in Embodiment 5 of the present application;

Figure 48 is a top view of the stirring gear and the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 5 of the present application when they are connected;

Figure 49 is a cross-sectional view along the A-A direction in Figure 48;

Figure 50 is a top view of the stirring gear driving the first rotating member to push the translational member to move according to Embodiment 5 of the present application;

Figure 51 is a cross-sectional view along the B-B direction in Figure 50;

Figure 52 is a top view of the stirring gear and the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 5 of the present application when they are in a separated state;

Figure 53 is a cross-sectional view along the C-C direction in Figure 52;

Figure 54 is a schematic structural diagram of a developing device provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 55 is an exploded view of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 56 is a schematic structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 57 is a schematic structural diagram of the second rotating member provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 58 is a schematic structural diagram of the linkage rod provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 59 is a schematic structural diagram of the linkage between the first rotating member and the second rotating member provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 60 is a schematic structural diagram of the linkage between the first rotating member and the second rotating member provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 61 is a schematic structural diagram of the upper cover provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 62 is a schematic structural diagram of the connection between the detected part and the translational part provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 63 is a schematic structural diagram of the second rotating member provided in Embodiment 7 of the present application;

Figure 64 is a schematic structural diagram of the second rotating member provided in Embodiment 7 of the present application;

Figure 65 is a schematic structural diagram of the first elastic component provided in Embodiment 7 of the present application;

Figure 66 is a schematic structural diagram of the contact between the first elastic component and the second rotating component provided in Embodiment 7 of the present application;

Figure 67 is a schematic structural diagram of the contact between the first elastic component and the second rotating component provided in Embodiment 7 of the present application;

Figure 68 is an exploded view of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 8 of the present application;

Figure 69 is a schematic structural diagram of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 8 of the present application;

Figures 70-75 are schematic structural diagrams of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 8 of the present application;

Figure 76 is a schematic structural diagram of the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 8 of the present application;

Figure 77 is a schematic structural diagram of the translational member provided in Embodiment 8 of the present application;

Figure 78 is a schematic structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 8 of the present application;

Figure 79 is a schematic structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 9 of the present application;

Figure 80 is a schematic structural diagram of the upper cover provided in Embodiment 9 of the present application;

Figure 81 is an exploded view of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 9 of the present application;

Figure 82 is a schematic structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 9 of the present application;

Figure 83 is another perspective of Figure 82;

Figure 84 is a schematic structural diagram of the swing member provided in Embodiment 9 of the present application;

Figure 85 is a schematic structural diagram of the detected part provided in Embodiment 9 of the present application;

Figure 86 is a schematic structural diagram of the second end of the box part provided in Embodiment 9 of the present application;

Figure 87 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first protective cover and the sliding member at the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 10 of the present application in an exploded state;

Figure 88 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 10 of the present application;

Figure 89 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 10 of the present application;

Figure 90 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first end of the box body of the developing device provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figure 91 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the second end of the box body of the developing device when the detected object is in a non-detecting position according to Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figure 92 is a partial enlarged schematic diagram of the dotted line position in Figure 91;

Figure 93 is a partially enlarged structural diagram of the second end of the box body of the developing device when the detected object is located at the detection position provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figures 94-96 are schematic exploded structural diagrams of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figures 97 and 98 are schematic exploded structural diagrams of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figure 99 is a schematic structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figure 100 is a schematic structural diagram of the third rotating member provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figure 101 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the translational member provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application when it is located closest to the first end;

Figure 102 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the translation member provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application when it is located at the position farthest from the first end;

Figure 103 is a three-dimensional schematic view of the developing device provided in Embodiment 12 of the present application;

Figure 104 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the transmission assembly at the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 12 of the present application;

Figure 105 is an exploded view of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 12 of the present application;

Figure 106 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 12 of the present application;

Figure 107 is another perspective of Figure 106;

Figure 108 is a schematic structural diagram of the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 12 of the present application;

Figure 109 is a schematic structural diagram of the contact piece provided in Embodiment 12 of the present application;

Figure 110 is a schematic structural diagram of the upper cover provided in Embodiment 12 of the present application;

Figure 111 is a schematic structural diagram of the translational component, the detected component and the first rotating component provided in Embodiment 12 of the present application;

Figure 112 is a schematic structural diagram of the side of the upper cover facing the first end provided in Embodiment 13 of the present application;

Figure 113 is a schematic structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 13 of the present application;

Figure 114 is a schematic structural diagram of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 13 of the present application;

Figure 115 is a schematic structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 14 of the present application;

Figure 116 is another perspective of Figure 115;

Figure 117 is a schematic structural diagram of the translational member provided in Embodiment 14 of the present application;

Figure 118 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 15 of the present application;

Figure 119 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of the developing device provided in Embodiment 15 of the present application after the first protective cover and the box body are separated;

Figure 120 is a second schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of the developing device provided in Embodiment 15 of the present application after the first protective cover and the box body are separated;

Figure 121 is a schematic diagram of the first end of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 15 of the present application when it meshes with the stirring gear;

Figure 122 is a schematic diagram of the first end when the first rotating member and the stirring gear are out of mesh provided in Embodiment 15 of the present application;

Figure 123 is a top view of the developing device when the detected object is in the detection position provided in Embodiment 15 of the present application;

Figure 124 is a top view of the developing device when the detected part is in the detection position after hiding the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 15 of the present application;

Figure 125 shows the display when the detected part is in a non-detecting position after hiding the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 15 of the present application. A top view of the shadow device;

Figures 126 and 127 are schematic exploded structural views of the first rotating member and the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 15 of the present application;

Figure 128 is a schematic exploded view of the first rotating member and the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 16 of the present application;

Figure 129 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first rotating member and the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 16 of the present application;

Figure 130 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application;

Figure 131 is a top view of the exploded structure when the swing member of the developing device provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application is in the first swing position;

Figure 132 is a top view of the exploded structure when the swing member of the developing device provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application is in the second swing position;

Figure 133 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the swing member and the box of the developing device provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application in an exploded state;

Figure 134 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the swing member provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application;

Figure 135 is a schematic structural diagram of the first end of the box after hiding the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application;

Figure 136 is a schematic structural diagram of the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application;

Figure 137 is a schematic structural diagram of the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application from another perspective;

Figure 138 is a schematic structural diagram of the contact piece provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application;

Figure 139 is a schematic structural diagram of the second end provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application;

Figures 140 and 141 are schematic structural views of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application;

Figure 142 is a schematic structural diagram of the upper cover provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application;

Figure 143 is an exploded schematic diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application;

Figure 144 is a schematic structural diagram of the swing member provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application;

Figure 145 is a schematic structural diagram of the swing member installed on the box body provided in Embodiment 18 of the present application;

Figure 146 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application;

Figure 147 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the translational component and the detected component provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application in an exploded state;

Figure 148 is a top view of the developing device after the first protective cover is hidden when the detected object is in the detection position provided in Embodiment 19 of the present application;

Figure 149 shows the display after hiding the first protective cover when the detected part is in the non-detecting position according to Embodiment 19 of the present application. A top view of the shadow device;

Figure 150 is a front view of the developing device after hiding the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 19 of the present application;

Figure 151 is a schematic structural diagram of the translational component, the pivoting component, and the detected component provided in Embodiment 19 of the present application;

Figure 152 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the translational component, the pivoting component, and the detected component provided in Embodiment 19 of the present application;

Figure 153 is a partially enlarged structural schematic diagram of the second end of the box body of the developing device when the detected object is in the non-detecting position provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figure 154 is a partially enlarged structural schematic diagram of the second end of the box body of the developing device when the detected object is located at the detection position provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figures 155 and 156 are schematic exploded structural diagrams of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 11 of the present application;

Figure 157 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 158 is an exploded structural diagram of the first end of the box provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 159 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 160 is a schematic exploded view of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 161 is a schematic structural diagram of the transmission unit, the detected part and the stirring shaft provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 162 is a schematic structural diagram of the transmission unit and the detected part provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 163 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the first connector provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figures 164 and 165 are schematic three-dimensional structural diagrams of the powder knife provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 166 is a cross-sectional view of the box provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 167 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the power receiving device provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 168 is a side view of the second end of the developing device and the detection member in the image forming device provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 169 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the third rotating member and the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 170 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the driving member provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 171 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the detected part provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 172 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the translational component and the third rotating component provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 173 is an exploded structural diagram of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 174 is a schematic structural diagram of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 175 is a schematic structural diagram of the second connector provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figures 176 and 177 are schematic structural diagrams of the detected part provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 178 is a schematic structural diagram of the driving member provided in Embodiment 20 of the present application;

Figure 179 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 21 of the present application;

Figure 180 is a schematic structural diagram of the first end of the box after hiding the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 21 of the present application;

Figure 181 is a schematic structural diagram of the first protective cover provided in Embodiment 21 of the present application;

Figure 182 is a schematic exploded view of the developing device provided in Embodiment 21 of the present application;

Figure 183 is a schematic exploded view of the developing device behind the hidden mixing rack provided in Embodiment 21 of the present application;

Figure 184 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the stirring gear, the third rotating member and the pivoting member provided in Embodiment 21 of the present application;

Figure 185 is a schematic exploded view of the pivot member provided in Embodiment 21 of the present application;

Figure 186 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the second end of the box provided in Embodiment 21 of the present application;

Figure 187 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the detected part provided in Embodiment 21 of the present application;

Figure 188 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application;

Figure 189 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the detected part and the swinging part in an exploded state provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application;

Figure 190 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the detected part and the swinging part in an exploded state provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application;

Figure 191 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application;

Figure 192 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the detected part and the swinging part in an exploded state provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application;

Figure 193 is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of the detected part and the swinging part in an exploded state provided in Embodiment 17 of the present application;

Figures 194 and 195 are schematic structural diagrams of the developing device provided in Embodiment 22 of the present application;

Figure 196 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the first end of the developing device provided in Embodiment 22 of the present application;

Figure 197 is a partial structural diagram of the first end of the developing device provided in Embodiment 22 of the present application;

Figure 198 is a partial enlarged schematic diagram of the dotted line in Figure 197;

Figure 199 is a schematic structural diagram of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 22 of the present application;

Figure 200 is a partially exploded structural diagram of the second end of the developing device provided in Embodiment 22 of the present application;

Figure 201 is a schematic structural diagram of the transition piece provided in Embodiment 22 of the present application;

Figures 202 and 203 are schematic structural diagrams of the developing device and detection component provided in Embodiment 23 of the present application;

Figure 204 is a schematic structural diagram of a developing device provided in Embodiment 23 of the present application;

Figures 205 and 206 are schematic structural diagrams of the first rotating member provided in Embodiment 23 of the present application;

Figures 207 and 208 are schematic structural diagrams of the stirring gear provided in Embodiment 23 of the present application;

Figure 209 is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the developing device provided in Embodiment 23 of the present application.

Detailed ways

In order to make the purpose, technical solutions and advantages of the present application clearer, the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described in more detail below in conjunction with the drawings in the preferred embodiments of the present application. In the drawings, the same or similar reference numbers throughout represent the same or similar components or components having the same or similar functions. The described embodiments are some, but not all, of the embodiments of the present application. The embodiments described below with reference to the drawings are exemplary and are intended to explain the present application, but should not be construed as limiting the present application. Based on the embodiments in this application, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative efforts fall within the scope of protection of this application. The embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.

In the description of this application, it should be noted that, unless otherwise clearly stated and limited, the terms "installation", "connection" and "connection" should be understood in a broad sense. For example, it can be a fixed connection or an intermediate connection. The medium is indirectly connected, which can be the internal connection between two components or the interaction between two components. For those of ordinary skill in the art, the specific meanings of the above terms in this application can be understood according to specific circumstances.

In the description of this application, it should be understood that the terms "upper", "lower", "front", "back", "vertical", "horizontal", "top", "bottom", "inner", The orientation or positional relationship indicated by "outside" is based on the orientation or positional relationship of the drawings. It is only for the convenience of describing the present application and simplifying the description. It does not indicate or imply that the device or element referred to must have a specific orientation or a specific orientation. orientation construction and operation, and therefore cannot be construed as a limitation on this application. In this application, the first direction is the left-right direction of the box body of the developing device (i.e., the directions A1 and A2 in Figure 194), the second direction is the front-to-back direction of the box body (i.e., the directions B1 and B2 in Figure 194), and the The three directions are the up and down directions of the box (ie, the C1 and C2 directions in Figure 194).

The terms "first", "second" and "third" (if present) in the description and claims of this application and the above-mentioned drawings are used to distinguish similar objects and are not necessarily used to describe a specific sequence or sequence. Sequence.

Furthermore, the terms "include" and "having" and any variations thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusions, e.g., a process, method, system, product, or display that includes a series of steps or units need not be limited to clear Those steps or elements that are expressly listed may instead include other steps or elements that are not expressly listed or that are inherent to the process, method, product, or display.

In the related art, the developing device is provided with a large number of transmission structures, so that the object being detected can make complex touching actions. And more transmission structures are arranged at the non-driving end of the developing device, that is, the end of the developing device that is not used to receive the force of the image forming device, which increases the overall size of the developing device. More transmission structures on the non-driving end make the developing device Miniaturization is more difficult.

After repeated thinking and verification, the inventor of the present application found that if a transmission assembly is provided at the first end of the box body of the developing device, the transmission assembly can receive the power of the image forming device and drive the developing assembly of the developing device to move. The detected part is fully or partially disposed at the second end of the box body, and the transmission assembly can drive the detected part to move between the detection position and the non-detection position through the transmission unit. In this way, the image forming device can obtain the information of the developing device, and at the same time, the transmission structure on the second end of the box body can be reduced, which facilitates the miniaturization of the developing device.

In view of this, the inventor of the present application designed a developing device. The transmission assembly is arranged at the first end of the box body, and the detected part is fully or partially arranged at the second end of the box body. Between the transmission assembly and the detected part transmitted through the transmission unit. The transmission component can drive the developing component to move after receiving the power output from the image forming device. At the same time, the transmission component can also drive the detected part to move between the detection position and the non-detection position through the transmission unit. In this way, the transmission structure on the second end of the box body can be reduced, which is beneficial to miniaturization of the developing device.

The technical solutions of the developing device provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.

Example 1:

As shown in FIGS. 1.1 to 1.27 , this embodiment discloses a developing device that can be detachably installed on a drum assembly in an image forming apparatus. The developing device includes a box body 100, a developing assembly, a transmission assembly, a transmission unit and a detected piece 500.

This embodiment also discloses an image forming device. The image forming device includes an installation compartment. The installation compartment is used to install a developing device. A power supply terminal and a detection component are provided in the installation compartment. The power supply terminal is used to provide electric energy to the developing device. The image forming apparatus forms an image on a recording material using, for example, electrophotographic imaging processing. The image forming apparatus includes, for example, an electrophotographic copying machine, an electrophotographic printer (LED printer, laser printer, etc.), an electrophotographic printer type facsimile machine, and the like. The image forming device includes a power output shaft. The power output shaft is used to transmit the driving force of the image forming device to the developing device 1 to operate the developing device 1 . The developing device 1 can be detachably mounted to the image forming apparatus together with the drum assembly 2 in a state of being mounted on the drum assembly 2, and a detector is provided in the image forming apparatus. The detection part 10 of the developing device 1 is measured. The detection part 10 moves after being triggered by the developing device 1, that is, it moves from the initial position to the triggering position.

As shown in Figures 1.4 and 1.5, the developing device 1 is detachably installed on the drum assembly 2. The drum assembly 2 has a photosensitive member. The photosensitive member is a photosensitive drum 60. The drum assembly 2 includes a right frame 30, a left frame 40, a front The frame 50, the rear frame 60, the bottom frame 70 and the photosensitive drum 80 are arranged oppositely in the first direction. The right frame 30 and the left frame 40 are arranged oppositely in the first direction. The front frame 50 and the rear frame 60 are arranged oppositely in the first direction. The bottom frame 70 is located between the right frame 30 and the left frame 40, and in the second direction, the bottom frame 70 is located between the front frame 50 and the rear frame 60. In the second direction, the photosensitive drum 80 is closer to the front frame 50 than the rear frame 60. The photosensitive drum 80 is at least partially covered by the front frame 50, and the front frame 50 has a protective effect on the photosensitive drum 80. The photosensitive drum 80 is used to receive the developer provided by the developing device 1, form an electrostatic latent image, and display the image on the imaging sheet. The drum handle 61 is located on the rear frame 60 and can be held by the user. The drum assembly 2 also includes a first guide part 31 and a second guide part 41. The first guide part 31 is located on the right frame 30 and the second guide part 41 is located on the left frame 40. The first guide part 31 and the second guide part 41 are used for The developing device 1 is guided during its mounting to the drum assembly 2 . The bottom frame 70 is provided with a first force applying member 71 , a second force applying member 72 , a first placement hole 73 , a second placement hole 74 and a locking member 75 . The first force applying member 71 and the second force applying member 72 are each provided with a force applying block and an elastic member such as a compression spring, or both the first force applying member 71 and the second force applying member 72 are elastic force applying members. The first force-applying member 71 and the second force-applying member 72 are both movable in the second direction relative to the drum assembly 2 . The first force-applying member 71 is closer to the right frame 30 relative to the left frame 40 in the first direction, the second force-applying member 72 is closer to the left frame 40 relative to the right frame 30 in the first direction, and the second force-applying member 72 is closer to the left frame 40 in the second direction. A force applying member 71 and a second force applying member 72 are closer to the rear frame 60 than the front frame 50 . The first placement hole 73 and the second placement hole 74 both pass through the bottom frame 70 in the third direction, and the first placement hole 73 is closer to the right frame 30 relative to the left frame 40 in the first direction. The locking member 75 is used to lock the developing device 1 . When the drum assembly 2 is installed in the developing device 1 , the right frame 30 is adjacent to the first end 110 of the box body 100 , and the left frame 40 is adjacent to the second end 120 of the box body 100 .

The box body 100 has an accommodation cavity for accommodating the developer. The box body 100 has a first end 110 and a second end 120 that are oppositely arranged in the first direction. The box body 100 has a third end that is oppositely arranged in the second direction. The box body 100 has an oppositely arranged fifth end 150 and a sixth end 160 in the third direction. The box body 100 is provided with a powder outlet, the powder outlet is located at the third end 130 , and the powder outlet exposes the circumferential surface of the developing roller 210 . The box body 100 is provided with a handle 141, and the handle 141 is located at the fourth end 140.

In an optional embodiment, as shown in Figures 1.6 and 1.8, the sixth end 160 of the box body 100 is provided with a paper guide 162, which extends along the first direction and is located at the first end 110 and the second end 120 When the developing device is installed on the drum assembly and both are installed on the image forming device, the guide plate 162 is exposed through the second placement hole 74 on the drum assembly. When the image forming device is in a working state, the guide plate 162 is exposed. Cardboard 162 is used to guide the sheet.

In an optional embodiment, the box body 100 is provided with a second groove 131. The second groove 131 is a plurality of grooves arranged along the first direction and recessed in the third direction. The second groove 131 is used for Strengthen the box body 100.

The developing assembly includes a developing roller 210 rotatably disposed in the box body 100 . The developing roller 210 is located at the third end 130 of the box body 100 . The axial direction of the developing roller 210 extends along the first direction. Illustratively, the developing assembly also includes a powder feeding roller 260 and a stirring frame 270. The developing roller 210, the powder feeding roller 260 and the stirring frame 270 are all rotatably installed in the accommodation cavity between the first end 110 and the second end 120. . The axial directions of the developing roller 210 , the powder feeding roller 260 and the stirring frame 270 all extend along the first direction, and the rotation axes of the developing roller 210 , the powder feeding roller 260 and the stirring frame 270 all extend along the first direction. The developing roller 210 is disposed at the powder outlet. The powder feeding roller 260 is disposed immediately adjacent to the developing roller 210 . The powder feeding roller 260 is closer to the fourth end 140 of the box body 100 than the developing roller 210 . The stirring frame 270 includes a stirring shaft and a stirring blade. Both ends of the stirring shaft are rotatably supported by the first end 110 and the second end 120 of the box 100. The stirring blades are fixedly installed on the stirring shaft and move together with the stirring shaft. , the stirring rack 270 is used to stir the developer in the accommodation chamber to prevent the developer from agglomerating.

As shown in Figure 1.2, a partition wall 161 is provided on the side wall of the sixth end 160 of the box body 100. The partition wall 161 bulges upward along the third direction. A developer passage opening 193 is formed for the developer to pass through. The developer passage opening 193 communicates with the developing chamber 192 and the developer containing chamber 191. The partition wall 161 separates the cavity into the developing chamber 192 and the developer containing chamber 191. In the second direction, the developing chamber 192 is closer to the powder outlet than the developer containing chamber 191 , the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 are arranged in the developing chamber 192 , and the stirring rack 270 is arranged in the developer containing chamber 191 .

As shown in Figures 1.9 and 1.10, the developing roller 210 includes a roller body 211 and a roller shaft 212. The roller body 211 and the roller shaft 212 both extend along the first direction. The roller body 211 is sleeved on the roller shaft 212 and covers the roller shaft 212. part, the roller body 211 is used to receive the developer delivered by the powder feeding roller 260 and transfer the developer to the photosensitive drum 80 , the roller shaft 212 is used to receive the power to cause the developing roller 210 to rotate, and the roller shaft 212 is close to the first direction in the first direction. One end of the one end 110 is provided with a D-shaped opening (not shown). The roller body 211 has a rubber component. When the roller body 211 contacts the powder blade 290, the rubber deformation amount of the roller body 211 at the contact location is consistent.

As shown in Figures 1.7, 1.9 and 1.10, the developing device also includes a powder outlet knife 290, which is used to contact the developing roller 210 and control the thickness of the developer layer on the roller body 211 of the developing roller 210. The powder knife 290 extends along the first direction. The powder knife 290 includes a knife holder 280 and a blade 250. The blade 250 is connected to the knife holder 280 by welding or gluing. In this embodiment, welding is preferably used to fix the blade 250. Connected to the tool holder 280.

The tool holder 280 includes a second mounting part 281 and a third mounting part 282. The second mounting part 281 extends generally along the second direction. The third mounting part 282 is bent on the basis of the second mounting part 281 and generally extends along the third direction. extend. The second mounting part 281 covers the second groove 131 , that is, the second mounting part 281 is supported by the second groove 131 in the third direction. The third mounting part 282 is provided with a powder knife mounting hole 2823. In this embodiment, there are two powder knife mounting holes 2823, namely the fourth mounting hole 2821 and the fifth mounting hole 2822. In other embodiments, the powder knife The mounting holes 2823 can be set according to actual needs. The fourth mounting hole 2821 and the fifth mounting hole 2822 both penetrate the third mounting part 282 in the second direction, and the knife holder 280 can be fixedly installed on the box body 100 through the powder knife mounting hole 2823 . In the first direction, the blade 250 is located between the fourth mounting hole 2821 and the fifth mounting hole 2822. The blade 250 extends generally along the third direction. The blade 250 includes a welding portion 251 , a contact portion 252 and a bending portion 253 . In the third direction, the welding portion 251 is located above the contact portion 252 and the bending portion 253 . The blade 250 passes through the welding portion 251 Fixedly connected to the tool holder 280. The contact portion 252 is used to contact the developing roller 210 and control the thickness of the developer layer on the roller body 211 of the developing roller 210 to ensure that the developer transferred by the developing roller 210 is uniform each time. The bending part 253 is formed by bending on the basis of the contact part 252. In order to better guide the developer, the bending part 253 in this embodiment is longer than the bending part 253 on the current ordinary powder blade 290. The angle between the bending part 253 and the contact part 252 is greater than 90°. In other embodiments, the bending part 253 may not be lengthened or the bending part 253 may not be provided.

It can be seen that in this embodiment, the powder knife 290 is a steel knife, that is, the knife holder 280 and the blade 250 are both made of steel material. In some embodiments, the powder knife 290 can be made of other materials.

It can be seen that in order to ensure that the blade 250 is welded to the tool holder 280 more stably, spot welding is used in this embodiment to ensure that the welding marks are more uniform. In other embodiments, other welding methods may be used.

As shown in Figure 1.10, the developing device is also provided with a sealing member. The sealing member can be installed on the box body 100 by adhesive. The sealing member is used to prevent the developer in the box body 100 from leaking.

In this embodiment, the sealing member includes a first sealing member 7001, a second sealing member 7002 and a third sealing member 7003. In the third direction, the first sealing member 7001 is located above the second sealing member 7002 and the third sealing member 7003. The first sealing member 7001 is in the shape of a block extending along the first direction, and the length of the first sealing member 7001 in the first direction is approximately Equivalent to the roller body 211 of the developing roller 210, in the second direction, the first sealing member 7001 is closer to the side wall of the third end 130 of the box body 100 than the powder blade 290. The first sealing member 7001 is used to prevent development The agent leaks out from between the side wall of the third end 130 of the box body 100 and the powder knife 290. In this embodiment, the first seal 7001 includes a sponge and a felt, and the sponge and the felt are compressed by the compression of the powder knife 290. The amount is the same. The second seal 7002 is closer to the first end 110 relative to the second end 120 in the first direction, the second seal 7002 is in contact with an end of the roller body 211 close to the first end 110 in the first direction, and the third seal 7003 is closer to the second end 120 relative to the first end 110 in the first direction, and the third seal 7003 is in contact with an end of the roller body 211 close to the second end 120 in the first direction. The second sealing member 7002 and the third sealing member 7003 both extend along the rotation direction of the developing roller 210 and are used to prevent the developer from leaking from both ends of the developing roller 210 . In the radial direction of the roller body 211, the roller body 211 at least partially overlaps the second sealing member 7002, and the roller body 211 at least partially overlaps the third sealing member 7003. In this implementation, the second sealing member 7002 and the third sealing member 7003 both include felt and sponge. In the rotation direction of the developing roller 210, the felt and the sponge are level. This embodiment does not limit the number of seals and the components of the seals, which can be set according to actual needs.

Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 1.11, the developing device also includes a first mounting bracket 117. The first mounting bracket 117 is detachably mounted on the first end 110. The first mounting bracket 117 is relative to the fourth end in the second direction. 140 closer to the third end 130, the first mounting bracket 117 is used to support the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260. The first mounting frame 117 includes a developing roller support hole and a powder feeding roller supporting hole. The developing roller supporting hole and the powder feeding roller supporting hole both penetrate the first mounting frame 117 in the first direction. The roller shaft of the developing roller 210 is close to the first end. One end of 110 passes through the supporting hole of the developing roller so that the developing gear 330 is fixedly installed on the roller shaft. One end of the axis of the powder feeding roller 260 close to the first end 110 passes through the supporting hole of the powder feeding roller so that the powder feeding gear 340 is fixedly installed on the feeding roller. Powder roller 260 axis.

In other embodiments of the first mounting bracket 117, as shown in Figures 1.20 to 1.25, the first mounting bracket 117 is provided with a first positioning hole 1174 in addition to the developing roller support hole 1171 and the powder feeding roller support hole 1172. , the second positioning hole 1175 and the positioning buckle 1176, the first positioning hole 1174 and the second positioning hole 1175 are arranged on the first mounting brackets on both sides of the rotation axis of the powder feeding roller 260 relative to the rotation axis of the powder feeding roller 260 117, the first end 110 of the box body 100 is integrally formed with a positioning protrusion 116 that can be inserted into the first positioning hole 1174 and the second positioning hole 1175. The positioning buckle 1176 is integrally formed at the rear end of the first mounting bracket 117. The positioning buckle 1176 protrudes to the left from the first mounting bracket 117. The first end 110 of the box body 100 has a snap-on portion 118 integrally formed therein. The buckle 1176 can be engaged with the buckling portion 118 of the first end 110 of the box body 100 to fix the first mounting bracket 117 to the first end 110 of the box body 100 .

The first mounting bracket 117 is also provided with a fourth recessed portion 1173. A driving support shaft 1101 is integrally formed on the first end 110 of the box body 100. The driving support shaft 1101 protrudes to the right along the first direction from the first end of the box body 100. 110. The power receiving device 320 is rotatably installed on and supported by the driving support shaft 1101. The fourth recessed portion 1173 avoids the driving support shaft 1101 to avoid interference between the first mounting bracket 117 and the driving support shaft 1101.

As shown in Figures 1.1 and 1.3, the developing device also includes a conductive component 900. The conductive component 900 includes a conductive member 910 installed on the second end 120 of the box body 100. The conductive member 910 has a first electrical contact portion 911, a second electrical contact portion 911, and a second electrical contact portion 911. The contact portion 912 and the third electrical contact portion, the first electrical contact portion 911 is used for electrical contact with the power supply terminal in the image forming apparatus, the second electrical contact portion 912 is used for electrical contact with the developing roller 210 , and the third electrical contact portion is for In electrical contact with the powder feeding roller 260 , the electric energy provided by the image forming device is transmitted to the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 .

As shown in Figure 1.3, the conductive component 900 also includes a support frame 913, and a conductive steel sheet can be used as the conductive member 910. The support frame 913 is removably fixed and installed on the second end 120 of the box body 100 through fasteners or buckles. The support frame 913 is provided with a first hole and a second hole, and the left end of the developing roller 210 is inserted into the first hole. , the left end of the powder feeding roller 260 is inserted into the second hole. The left end surface of the support frame 913 is integrally provided with a guide protrusion 9131. The left end surface of the guide protrusion 9131 includes a first guide surface 91311 and a second guide surface 91312. In the second direction, the first guide surface The surface 91311 is located on the front side of the second guide surface 91312, and the front end of the first guide surface 91311 is further to the right than the rear end. The front end of the second guide surface 91312 is connected to the rear end of the first guide surface 91311, and the front end of the second guide surface 91312 is further to the left than the rear end. A third mounting hole 91313 is opened on the support frame 913. The first electrical contact portion 911 of the conductive member 910 is located in the third mounting hole 91313 and is exposed to the outside of the third mounting hole 91313 by the third mounting hole 91313. The first electrical contact portion 911 is arranged obliquely and parallel to the second guide surface 91312.

Through the above arrangement, when the developing device is installed into the image forming device, the power supply terminal in the image forming device first passes through the first guide surface 91311, because the front end of the first guide surface 91311 is closer than the rear end. Right, so the power supply terminal is squeezed and elastically deformed. When the developing device is installed in place, the power supply terminal contacts the second guide surface 91312 and presses against the first electrical contact portion 911 under the action of elastic force, and due to the second The front end of the guide surface 91312 is further to the left than the rear end, so that the power supply terminal of the developing device and the image forming device can be prevented from swinging forward during operation, so that the power supply terminal remains pressed against the first electrical contact portion 911 to prevent the power supply terminal from swinging forward. Poor contact.

As shown in Figure 1.19, in another implementation of the conductive component 900, the first guide surface 91311 is perpendicular to the first direction, and the front end of the second guide surface 91312 is located on the left side of the first guide surface 91311, so that There is a step 91314 between the second guide surface 91312 and the first guide surface 91311.

The transmission assembly is disposed at the first end 110 and is configured to drive the developing assembly to move after receiving power output from the image forming device. Specifically, the transmission assembly includes a power receiving device 320 rotatably installed on the first end 110 of the box body 100, and the rotation axis of the power receiving device 320 is parallel to the first direction. The power receiving device 320 includes a driving gear 322 and a power receiving part 321. The driving gear 322 is located on a side of the power receiving part 321 facing the first end 110 and is coaxially arranged with the power receiving part 321. The number of driving gears 322 may be one or multiple, and those skilled in the art may set it according to actual needs. The driving gear 322 can be fixed to the power receiving portion 321 through one-time molding or fastening with fasteners, which is not uniquely limited here. It is worth mentioning that the power receiving part 321 is used to couple with the power output shaft on the image forming device to receive the power output by the image forming device.

The transmission assembly also includes a developing gear 330, a powder feeding gear 340 and a stirring gear 310 that are rotatably installed on the first end 110. The developing gear 330 is fixedly connected to one end of the developing roller 210 close to the first end 110 of the box body 100. The powder feeding gear 340 The powder feeding roller 260 is fixedly connected to an end thereof close to the first end 110 of the box body 100 , and the stirring gear 310 is fixedly connected to an end of the stirring shaft close to the first end 110 of the box body 100 . The number of the stirring gears 310 may be one or multiple. When the number of the stirring gears 310 is multiple, the plurality of stirring gears 310 may be coaxially arranged, and the diameters of the plurality of stirring gears 310 may be different.

The rotation axis of the power receiving device 320 is closer to the fifth end 150 and the fourth end 140 of the box 100 than the rotation axis of the developing roller 210 , and the rotation axis of the power receiving device 320 is closer than the rotation axis of the powder feeding roller 260 . Close to the fifth end 150 and the fourth end 140 of the box body 100 , the rotation axis of the power receiving device 320 is closer to the third end 130 and the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 than the rotation axis of the stirring frame 270 .

As an optional embodiment, when viewed from the first direction, the tool holder 280 of the powder knife is roughly L-shaped. If the L-shaped tool holder 280 is surrounded by a complete rectangle, then the power receiving device 320 of the developing device will be The axis of rotation is not within a rectangular range, and in this embodiment, the power receiving device 320 and the powder outlet blade do not completely overlap.

As an optional embodiment, the transmission assembly further includes an idler gear 350 , which is rotatably supported by the first end 110 of the box body 100 . In other embodiments, a first protective cover 610 is provided on the first end 110 , and the idler wheel 350 can also be rotatably supported by the first protective cover 610 . Wherein, the rotation axis of the idler gear 350 is parallel to the first direction Towards. Those skilled in the art can set the number, size and specific position of the idlers 350 as needed, which is not uniquely limited here.

The developing gear 330 , the powder feeding gear 340 and the stirring gear 310 may directly mesh with the driving gear 322 , or the driving gear 322 may mesh with one or more of the developing gear 330 , the powder feeding gear 340 and the stirring gear 310 through the idler gear 350 . In other embodiments, the driving gear 322 can also drive the developing gear 330, the powder feeding gear 340 and the stirring gear 310 to rotate through belt transmission or friction transmission, which is not uniquely limited here.

In some embodiments, as shown in Figures 1.13 to 1.18, the first end 110 of the box body 100 is equipped with a first protective cover 610, and the second end 120 of the box body 100 is equipped with a second protective cover 620. The second protective cover 620 Covering at least part of the second end 120 of the box body 100, the first protective cover 610 is integrally formed with a first forced push protrusion 616 at its rear end, and the rear end of the second protective cover 620 is integrally formed with a second forced push protrusion 629.

When the developing device is installed on the drum assembly, the first forced pushing protrusion 616 and the second forced pushing protrusion 629 contact the pushing member on the drum assembly and receive the forward urging force provided by the pushing member, so that the first The forced pushing protrusion 616 and the second forced pushing protrusion 629 drive the entire developing device to move forward, so that the developing device drives the developing roller 210 forward to abut against the photosensitive drum 80 on the drum assembly, ensuring that the developing roller 210 and the photosensitive drum 80 of close contact.

The first protective cover 610 is also provided with a second recessed portion 617 , and the second recessed portion 617 is located between the rotation axis of the stirring gear 310 and the first forced pushing protrusion 616 in the second direction. The drum assembly includes a separation lever 20, which can rotate around a rotation axis parallel to the first direction. The separation lever 20 includes an operating part 21 and an action part 22. The operating part 21 is located on the rotation axis of the separation lever 20. On the front side, the action part 22 is located on the rear side of the rotation axis of the release lever 20 . The operation part 21 is used to be pressed by the user, and the action part 22 is used to contact the developing device and lift the developing device upward.

When the developing device is installed on the drum assembly, the projection of the second recessed portion 617 in the first direction coincides with the projection of the movement trajectory of the action portion 22 on the drum assembly in the first direction, so that if the user moves the drum assembly of the separation lever 20, the action part 22 will move in the second recessed portion 617 without contacting the developing device and thus unable to lift the developing device upward, thus preventing the separation lever 20 from frequently moving against the gravity of the developing device. deformation.

The second protective cover 620 is provided with a third recess 6201. The second end 120 of the box body 100 is provided with a powder filling port 1206. The developer is filled into the box body 100 through the powder filling port 1206. The powder filling port 1206 is equipped with a The sealing cover 1207 that seals the powder filling port 1206, the projection of at least part of the powder filling port 1206 and at least part of the sealing cover 1207 in the first direction and The projections of at least part of the third recessed portion 6201 in the first direction coincide with each other, so that the sealing cover 1207 can be removed without disassembling the second protective cover 620 .

The second protective cover 620 is integrally formed with a sealing ring 6202. The sealing ring 6202 is integrally formed and protrudes to the right from the right end of the second protective cover 620. The second end 120 of the box body 100 is integrally formed with a supporting mixing rack 270. The rotating stirring rack support hole 1205 is a through hole. A seal is installed in the stirring rack support hole 1205. The sealing member is an annular ring set on the left end of the mixing rack 270. The sealing member is a sponge, and the sealing ring The ring 6202 is inserted into the support hole 1205 of the mixing rack and abuts against the sealing member, thereby preventing the sealing member from coming out of the supporting hole 1205 of the mixing rack to the left.

Schematically, as shown in Figures 1.8 and 1.12, the developing device also includes an identification component. The identification component includes a storage medium 820, an electrical contact surface 810 and a bracket 830. The storage medium 820 is used to store data, and the electrical contact surface 810 is used to contact and electrically connect with identification contacts in the image forming device. The bracket 830 is detachably installed on the box body 100. The storage medium 820 and the electrical contact surface 810 are electrically connected and both are installed on the bracket 830. The electrical contact surface 810 is closer to the rear side of the box body 100 than the central axis of the power receiving device 320 . Exemplarily, in a state where the developing device is installed on the drum assembly, the storage medium 820 is exposed through the first placement hole 73 on the drum assembly to contact the image forming device.

As shown in Figures 1.26 and 1.27, the drum assembly is provided with a bracket 830 at a position close to the right frame 30 in the first direction, that is, the bracket 830 is closer to the right frame 30 than the left frame 40, and the storage medium 820 is detachably installed on the drum assembly. On the bracket 830, the storage medium 820 includes an electrical contact surface 810 that is electrically connected thereto. The electrical contact surface 810 can be in contact with the image forming device. The storage medium 820 is used to store information about the developing device. When the developing device is installed to the drum assembly, the developing device Mounted to the image forming device together with the drum assembly, the electrical contact surface 810 of the storage medium 820 contacts the image forming device and transmits information from the developing device to the image forming device. In the first direction, the storage medium 820 is juxtaposed with the second placement hole 74 .

The detected part 500 is at least partially located at the second end 120. The detected part 500 is transmission connected with the transmission assembly through the transmission unit. The detected part 500 can move between the detection position and the non-detection position.

It can be understood that when the image forming device outputs power to the power receiving device 320 to drive the developing assembly to move, the transmission assembly can drive the detected component 500 to move between the detection position and the non-detection position through the transmission unit. It is worth mentioning that when the detected part 500 is located at the detection position, the detected part 500 moves the detection part of the image forming device, so that the detection circuit in the image forming device generates an electrical signal, so that the developing device is detected. arrive. When the detected part 500 is located at the non-detection position, the detection part of the image forming apparatus is reset, and at this time, the generation of electrical signals in the image forming apparatus stops.

The developing device provided in this embodiment includes a box body 100, a developing component, a transmission component, a transmission unit and a detected component 500. When the transmission component receives the power output from the image forming device to drive the development component to move, the transmission component can pass The transmission unit drives the detected part 500 to move between the detection position and the non-detection position, so that the image forming device can detect the information of the developing device. The transmission assembly is arranged at the first end 110 of the box body 100, and the detected piece 500 is at least partially located at the second end 120 of the box body 100, which reduces the space occupied by the transmission structure at the second end 120 of the box body 100 and facilitates the implementation of the developing device. of miniaturization.

Example 2

As shown in Figures 2 to 18, this embodiment provides a display device.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, in one possible implementation, the transmission unit includes a first rotating member 410 and a transmission member. The first rotating member 410 is rotatably provided at the first end 110 of the box 100. A rotating member 410 is drive-connected to the transmission assembly and the transmission member respectively, and the detected piece 500 is drive-connected to the transmission member.

Schematically, a first support column is provided at the first end 110, and the axis of the first support column extends along the first direction, and the first rotating member 410 is rotatably mounted on the first support column. The first rotating member 410 includes a gear portion 4104, which can mesh with the stirring gear 310. When the power receiving device 320 drives the stirring gear 310 to rotate, the stirring gear 310 can drive the first rotating member 410 to rotate around itself through the gear portion 4104. The axis of rotation rotates. When the first rotating member 410 rotates around its own rotation axis, it can drive the transmission member to move relative to the box body 100. The transmission member extends from the first end 110 of the box body 100 to the second end 120 of the box body 100, and is driven by the transmission member. The detection part 500 moves relative to the box body 100 .

In this structure, by arranging the first rotating member 410 and the transmission member, when the image forming device drives the transmission assembly to move, the transmission assembly can drive the first rotating member 410 to rotate, and the first rotating member 410 drives the object to be detected through the transmission member when rotating. 500 moves, when the detected part 500 moves to the detection position, the detected part 500 moves the detection part of the image forming device, and the detection circuit in the image forming device generates an electrical signal, so that the image forming device can obtain the information of the developing device.

In a possible implementation, the transmission member includes a translation member 420 extending along the first direction, and the translation member 420 is capable of generating displacement in the first direction. The translation member 420 A first driven part 421 is provided at one end of the first rotating member 410 and at least one of the first driven parts 421 has an opposite direction. The first transmission surface 403 is inclined in the first direction. Specifically, the translation member 420 can be displaced in the first direction relative to the box body 100 .

When the transmission assembly drives the first rotating member 410 to rotate, under the action of the first transmission surface 403, the first rotating member 410 can exert a component force along the first direction on the translational member 420, and the component force drives the translational member 420. 420 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction. Then, the detected piece 50010 is driven to move relative to the box body 100 .

For example, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 6 , the first rotating member 410 is provided with a first disk portion 411 , the first disk portion 411 is provided with a recess 4111 , and the first driven portion 421 and the first disk portion 411 The first driven portion 421 is offset and can extend into the recessed portion 4111 .

Schematically, the translation member 420 forms a rod-shaped structure. Specifically, the translation member 420 includes a first rod part 428, a second disk part 429 and a first driven part 421. The first rod part 428 extends along the first direction. In this embodiment, the first rod part 428 is cylindrical. In other embodiments, the first rod part 428 may also be prism-shaped, or have an irregular cross-section (vertical cross-section). other columnar shape (section along the length direction of the first rod portion 428). The second disk part 429 may be integrally formed on an end of the first rod part 428 close to the first end 110 of the box body 100 . In this embodiment, the second disk portion 429 is in the shape of a disk. In other embodiments, the second disk portion 429 can also be in the shape of a rectangular disk, a parallelogram disk, or other shapes. The second disk part 429 is coaxially arranged with the first rod part 428, the stirring gear 310, and the stirring shaft 220. The first driven part 421 may be integrally formed on a side of the second disk part 429 away from the first end 110 of the box body 100 in the first direction, and the first driven part 421 moves away from the second disk part 429 along the first direction. The direction protrudes from the second disk portion 429 .

In this embodiment, the stirring shaft 220 is formed into a hollow columnar structure. The first rod part 428 is located in the stirring shaft 220 . The first rod part 428 extends along the first direction and penetrates the box 100 and the stirring shaft 220 . 428 and the stirring shaft 220 are in sliding fit. The above arrangement is beneficial to reducing the space occupied by the transmission components inside the box body 100 .

The gear part 4104 is closer to the first end 110 of the box 100 in the first direction than the first disk part 411. The first disk part 411 may be fixed to the gear part 4104 by integral molding or key connection. In this embodiment, the shape of the first disk portion 411 is circular. In other embodiments, the shape of the first disk portion 411 may also be a rectangle, a parallelogram or other suitable shapes.

As shown in FIG. 6 , the recessed portion 4111 may be a notch that is recessed along the radial direction of the first disk portion 411 and toward a direction close to the central axis of the first disk portion 411 . For example, the number of recessed portions 4111 may be two, and the two recessed portions 4111 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction of the first disk portion 411 .

In this embodiment, the recessed portion 4111 and the first driven portion 421 each have a first transmission surface 403, wherein the first transmission surface 403 on the first driven portion 421 allows the first driven portion 421 to move away from the first driven portion 421 in the first direction. One side of the second plate part 429. Viewed along the first direction, the area swept by the first driven portion 421 and the first transmission surface 403 on the recessed portion 4111 when moving at least partially overlaps. The first transmission surface 403 on the first driven portion 421 has opposite first edges and second edges. The first edge is located upstream of the second edge in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410 (that is, when the first rotating member 410 rotates in the rotation direction, the first transmission surface 403 on the recess 4111 first passes through the first edge and then the second edge). Two edges), the first edge is closer to the first end 110 of the box 100 than the second edge in the first direction. In the first direction, the first edge is closer to the first end 110 of the box 100 than the first transmission surface 403 on the recess 4111, thereby avoiding the recess 4111. The first transmission surface 403 on the first driven part 421 is stuck. In other embodiments, the first transmission surface 403 may be provided on only one of the recessed portion 4111 and the first driven portion 421 . This embodiment does not limit the angle between the first transmission surface 403 and the first direction, and those skilled in the art can set it according to actual needs.

When the first driven part 421 extends into the recessed part 4111, the detected part 500 is in the non-detecting position. As the first rotating part 410 rotates, under the action of the first transmission surface 403, the side walls of the recessed part 4111 push against each other. The first driven part 421 is used to push the first driven part 421 out of the recess 4111. At this time, the translation member 420 drives the detected member 500 to move from the non-detection position to the detection position. When the detected object 500 moves to the detection position, the detection circuit of the image forming device generates an electrical signal, so that the image forming device can obtain information about the developing device.

In a possible implementation, a third elastic member 750 is connected to the transmission member, and the third elastic member 750 is configured to keep the transmission member in contact with the first rotating member 410 .

For example, the third elastic member 750 is connected between the second disk part 429 and the stirring gear 310. In this embodiment, the third elastic member 750 may be a compression spring. When the first rotating member 410 rotates until the position of the recessed portion 4111 corresponds to the position of the first driven portion 421 , the driven portion extends into the interior of the recessed portion 4111 under the elastic force of the third elastic member 750 . At this time, the object to be detected 500 moves from the detection position to the non-detection position.

In a possible implementation, the first end 110 is provided with a first protective cover 610, one end of the translation member 420 is provided with a first positioning portion 422, the first protective cover 610 is provided with a positioning matching portion 611, A positioning portion 422 extends into the positioning matching portion 611 to limit the rotation of the translation member 420 .

The first protective cover 610 is removably and fixedly installed on the first end 110 of the box body 100. The first protective cover 610 covers the transmission assembly to protect the transmission assembly. The first protective cover 610 can be fastened by fasteners or connected by snapping. It is fixed on the first end 110 of the box body 100 in other ways, and is not uniquely limited here. Schematically, the first positioning part 422 is integrally formed on the side of the second plate part 429 away from the first end 110 of the box 100 in the first direction, and the first positioning part 422 protrudes along the first direction. In this embodiment, The first positioning portion 422 is in the shape of a square bump. The positioning fitting part 611 is in the shape of a groove that matches the first positioning part 422 in shape and size. Through the cooperation between the first positioning part 422 and the positioning fitting part 611, the translation member 420 is prevented from being caused by the first rod part 428 and the stirring shaft. 220 to rotate, thereby ensuring that the side wall of the recessed portion 4111 can reliably push the first driven portion 421 when the first rotating member 410 rotates. In other embodiments, the first positioning part 422 and the positioning matching part 611 may also be in other forms such as buckles and slots.

In a possible implementation, the first rotating member 410 includes an engaging segment 4101 and a notch segment 4102. The engaging segment 4101 and the notched segment 4102 are arranged around the first rotating member 410, and the engaging segment 4101 is configured to engage with the transmission assembly.

Schematically, the meshing section 4101 and the notch section 4102 are provided on the circumferential surface of the gear part 4104, that is to say, the gear part 4104 is an incomplete gear. The gear portion 4104 can be meshed with the stirring gear 310 through the meshing section 4101, and can be disengaged from the stirring gear 310 through the notch section 4102. When the first rotating component 410 is disengaged from the stirring gear 310, the detected component 500 is always kept at the same position.

With this structure, the first rotating member 410 can mesh with the transmission assembly through the meshing section 4101, so that the transmission assembly can drive the first rotating member 410 to rotate. The first rotating member 410 can be disengaged from the transmission assembly through the notch. When the transmission assembly moves, the first rotating member 410 stops rotating, ends the detection process, and completes the detection process of the developing device.

In the initial state (the developing device is brand new from the factory and has not been used), the first rotating member 410 is located in the first direction where one of the recesses 4111 is aligned with the first driven portion 421 in the first direction. position (that is, the first driven portion 421 is located in the recess 4111 when viewed from the first direction). In the initial state, after the developing device is installed in the image forming device, the detected part 500 is in the non-detecting position. At this time, the detecting part in the image forming device is not moved by the detected part 500 .

When the power receiving portion 321 receives the power output from the image forming device and rotates, the power is transmitted to the developing roller 210 , the powder feeding roller 260 , and the stirring frame 270 through the meshing relationship between the gears in the transmission assembly, so that the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 270 are rotated. The roller 260 and the stirring frame 270 start to rotate, so that the developing device starts to operate.

The translation member 420 cannot rotate together with the stirring rack 270 under the restriction of the first positioning part 422 and the positioning matching part 611. At the same time, the rotation of the stirring gear 310 drives the gear part 4104 to rotate, and the gear part 4104 in turn drives the first The rotating member 410 rotates together, and the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410 is the clockwise direction in FIG. 14 (shown by the arrow). The rotation of the first rotating member 410 drives the concave portion 4111 on the first disk portion 411 to rotate together. Under the action of the first transmission surface 403, the side wall of the recess 4111 exerts a force parallel to the first direction on the first driven part 421, so that the first driven part 421 drives the translation member 420 along the first direction. Movement to the left, while the second disk portion 429 compresses the elastic member to the left. At this time, the object to be detected 500 is in the detection position. It can be understood that when the first rotating member 410 is provided with the first transmission surface 403, the side wall of the recess 4111 is the first transmission surface 403. The detected component 500 moves the detection component so that the detection circuit in the image forming apparatus generates an electrical signal.

Then, as the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, the first rotating member 410 rotates to a position where the other concave portion 4111 is aligned with the first driven portion 421 in the first direction. At this time, the elastic potential energy accumulated in the elastic member is released. The translating member 420 is caused to move rightward along the first direction. At this time, the detected object 500 moves from the detection position to the non-detection position. After the detected part 500 moves to the non-detection position, the detection part is reset, and at this time, the generation of electrical signals in the image forming apparatus stops.

Then, as the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, under the action of the first transmission surface 403, the side wall of the other recess 4111 pushes the translation member 420 to move leftward along the first direction again, so that the detected member 500 again Move to the detection position. As a result, the detection circuit in the image forming apparatus generates an electrical signal for the second time.

Then as the first rotating part 410 continues to rotate, the notch section 4102 on the gear part 4104 rotates to the position where the gear part 4104 meshes with the stirring gear 310, so that the gear part 4104 and the stirring gear 310 are disengaged, so that the first rotating part 410 stops rotating, ends the detection process, and completes the detection process of the developing device.

In addition, after the first driven part 421 is pushed out from the other recessed part 4111 until the gear part 4104 is disengaged from the stirring gear 310, the detected part 500 continues to be maintained at the detection position, so the second electrical signal continues to be generated. In other embodiments, a termination opening may also be added to the first disk part 411 along the radial direction of the first disk part 411 and recessed in a direction close to the central axis of the first disk part 411 . The sector-shaped surface surrounding the termination opening on the disk part 411 covers the notch section 4102, so that when the first rotating member 410 is disengaged from the stirring gear 310, the first driven part 421 is inserted into the termination opening under the elastic force of the elastic member, so that when When the first rotating component 410 stops moving, the detected component 500 is in a non-detecting position.

Based on one or a combination of one or more information from the number, time interval, and duration of the electrical signals, the image forming device can determine the information of the developing device (such as model, newness, capacity, life, etc.).

In other embodiments, the number of recesses 4111, the spacing between the recesses 4111, and the length of the first transmission surface 403 can be changed on the first rotating member 410 to change the number, time interval, and duration of the electrical signals to correspond to different models. developing device information.

The beneficial effect of the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment is that only one detected component 500 needs to be installed on the second end 120 of the developing device without the need to install other transmission parts, which simplifies the structure of the developing device and reduces the burden of components on the box. The occupied space of the second end 120 of the body 100 is beneficial to miniaturization of the developing device.

As shown in FIG. 18 , as another structure of the first rotating member 410 , the recessed portion 4111 is formed as a through hole penetrating the first disk portion 411 .

In addition, the recess 4111 may also be designed to be recessed from the side of the first rotating member 410 close to the box body 100 along the first direction and toward the direction away from the first end 110 of the box body 100 (ie, blind hole or groove shape).

It is also possible to provide a first transmission protrusion extending in the first direction toward the first end 110 of the box body 100 on the side of the first rotating member 410 close to the box body 100, and use the protrusion to replace the recessed portion 4111, and the protrusion drives the The translation member 420 is displaced relative to the box body 100 along the first direction.

This embodiment provides a piece to be detected 500 that can move relative to the box body 100 when the transmission unit includes a translational member 420 and the translational member 420 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction.

As shown in Figures 11, 13 and 16, in one possible implementation, this embodiment provides a developing device in which the detected part 500 includes a first arm 510, a second pivot part 520 and a second arm. 530. The second pivot part 520 is rotatably mounted on the second end 120. The rotation axis of the second pivot part 520 is perpendicular to the first direction. There is an included angle between the extension direction of the first arm 510 and the extension direction of the second arm 530. One end of the first arm 510 away from the second pivot part 520 is used to abut the other end of the translation member 420 .

Exemplarily, the second end 120 of the box body 100 is provided with a first support seat 124 , and the first support seat 124 extends from the second end 120 of the box body 100 in a first direction away from the box body 100 . A first support shaft 125 is provided on the first support base 124 , and the first support shaft 125 extends from the first support base 124 along the second direction away from the developing roller 210 . The second pivot part 520 is rotatably supported by the first support shaft 125 , and the rotation axis of the second pivot part 520 is parallel to the second direction.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 13 , the first arm 510 extends from the second pivot portion 520 along the second direction away from the developing roller 210 . The second arm 530 extends along the first direction from the second pivot portion 520 toward a direction away from the second end 120 of the box body 100 . The first arm 510 and the second arm 530 form an included angle of 90°. The end of the first arm 510 away from the second pivot part 520 in the second direction is the force-bearing end, and the second arm 530 is away from the second pivot part 520 in the first direction. One end of the two pivoting parts 520 is a force applying end. In the first direction, the force-bearing end of the first arm 510 is aligned with an end of the first rod portion 428 close to the second end 120 of the box body 100 . The force-applying end of the second arm 530 is used to apply force to the detection component in the image forming device outside the developing device, so that the detection component is moved, thereby causing the detection circuit in the image forming device to generate an electrical signal, thereby causing the developing device to be detected. . The first arm 510, the second arm 530 and the second pivot part 520 form a lever mechanism.

In this embodiment, when the translation member 420 moves from the first end 110 to the second end 120 along the first direction, the force-receiving end of the first arm 510 is pushed by the translation member 420 to swing to the left, thereby causing The force-applying end of the second arm 530 swings upward to move the detection component in the image forming device, causing the detection circuit in the image forming device to generate an electrical signal. When the translation member 420 moves from the second end 120 to the first end 110 along the first direction, the detected member 500 can return to the non-detection position under the action of gravity (in other embodiments, an elastic member may also be provided. So that the detected piece 500 returns to the non-detecting position under the elastic force of the elastic member). After the detected part 500 moves to the non-detection position, the detection part is reset, and at this time, the generation of electrical signals in the image forming apparatus stops.

It is worth mentioning that the detected component 500 provided in this embodiment can also be used in other developing devices having a translation component 420 .

Example 3

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 31 , this embodiment provides a developing device. The difference from the developing device provided in the above embodiment is that the structure of the transmission unit is different.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 21 , a second mounting bracket 1202 is detachably installed on the second end 120 of the box body 100 . The second mounting bracket 1202 has a conductive hole 12021 for the first electrical contact portion 911 to extend. The conductive member 910 of the conductive assembly 900 can be installed on the second mounting bracket 1202. The second mounting bracket 1202 is used to rotatably support the left end of the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260. The second mounting bracket 1202 is supported by the second end 120. , therefore the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 are indirectly supported by the second end 120 .

In a possible implementation, the developing assembly includes a stirring shaft, the first rotating member is coaxially arranged with the stirring shaft, the first rotating member is used to provide power for the stirring shaft, and the The first transmission surface is provided on the side of the first transmission member facing the first end 110 .

Specifically, the transmission assembly includes a stirring gear 310 that is rotatably mounted on the first end 110. In this embodiment, the stirring gear 310 is also the first rotating member, and the stirring gear 310 is provided with a second transmission protrusion 312 (equivalent to the following The first transmission protrusion), the second transmission protrusion 312 is provided with a second transmission surface 3121 which is equivalent to the first transmission surface. The second transmission protrusion 312 is located on a side of the stirring gear 310 facing the second end 120 . The transmission unit includes The translation member 420 extends in the first direction. The translation member 420 can displace relative to the box body 100 in the first direction. In this embodiment, the translation member 420 can move along the first direction. The second transmission protrusion 312 is configured to offset one end of the translation member 420 . In the rotation direction of the stirring gear 310, the thickness of the second transmission protrusion 312 gradually increases.

Specifically, the second transmission protrusion 312 can be integrally formed on the left end surface of the mixing gear 310, and the second transmission protrusion 312 extends along the circumferential direction of the mixing gear 310, and the second transmission protrusion 312 moves to the left along the first direction. protruding from the left end surface of the stirring gear 310. 20 and 21 show that the second transmission protrusion 312 is provided with a second transmission surface 3121. In the rotation direction of the stirring gear 310 (clockwise when viewed from right to left), the second transmission surface 3121 The upstream end is further to the right than the downstream end.

The first end 110 of the box body 100 is provided with a first through hole penetrating the first end 110 along the first direction, and the second end 120 is provided with a second through hole penetrating the second end 120 along the first direction. The first through hole and the second through hole are coaxially arranged. The translation member 420 is in the shape of a long cylindrical rod. The translation member 420 moves along the first direction and is inserted into the first through hole and the second through hole and is moved by the first through hole. and a second via support. The translator 420 passes through the box body 100 . The right end of the translator 420 is integrally provided with a first driven part 421 . The first driven part 421 protrudes from the translator 420 along the radial direction of the translator 420 . circumferential surface. The translation member 420 has a first position and a second position. In the first position, the first driven portion 421 on the translation member 420 is in contact with the left end surface of the stirring gear 310 . In the second position, the translation member 420 is in contact with the downstream end of the second transmission surface 3121. When the translation member 420 is located at the first position, the entire translation member 420 is further to the right than when it is located at the second position. When the developing device is in the factory default state, the translation member 420 is in the first position.

For example, the conductive member 910 of the conductive assembly 900 may be a conductive steel sheet, and the conductive member 910 includes a first electrical contact portion 911 and a second electrical contact portion 912 . The first electrical contact part 911 is in contact with and electrically connected to the second protective cover 620 on the box body 100, the second electrical contact part 912 is in contact with and electrically connected to the powder feeding roller 260, and the conductive member 910 is fixed on the second mounting bracket 1202. 120 on the second end. The first electrical contact portion 911 of the conductive member 910 is in the shape of a raised steel sheet. After the second protective cover 620 is installed on the second end 120, the second protective cover 620 presses on the first electrical contact portion 911, so that the second protective cover 620 presses against the first electrical contact portion 911. An electrical contact part 911 is elastically deformed, so that the first electrical contact part 911 and the second protective cover 620 are kept in close contact under the action of elastic force to avoid poor contact.

During the operation of the developing device provided in this embodiment, the power receiving part 321 receives the power output from the image forming device and rotates, thereby driving the developing roller 210, the powder feeding roller 260 and the stirring frame 270 to rotate. During the rotation of the stirring gear 310, the second transmission protrusion 312 rotates together with the stirring gear 310, so that the stirring gear 310 contacts the first driven portion 421 from the left end surface of the stirring gear 310 and rotates to the second drive protrusion 312. The upstream end of the second transmission surface 3121 contacts the first driven part 421 and then rotates until the downstream end of the second transmission surface 3121 contacts the first driven part 421 . When the driven part 421 contacts, in the process of the mixing gear 310 contacting the first driven part 421 from the left end surface and the downstream end of the second transmission surface 3121 contacting the first driven part 421, the first driven part 421 is The driving drives the translation member 420 to move from the first position to the second position, and stops the translation member 420 at the second position. The translation member 420 causes the detected member 500 to move relative to the box body 100 during the movement.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 31 , a second protective cover 620 is provided on the second end 120 , and the detected component 500 is rotationally installed on the second protective cover 620 . The transmission unit also includes a slider installed on the other end of the translational member 420 . Block 490, the sliding block 490 is provided with a pushing protrusion 491, and the pushing protrusion 491 is configured to push the detected piece 500 to rotate to the detection position.

The detected piece 500 is in the shape of a lever, and includes a second pivot part 520 , a first arm 510 , and a second arm 530 . The second protective cover 620 is detachably installed on the second end 120. The second protective cover 620 is integrally provided with two third support seats 628. The third support seats 628 are each provided with support openings 6281. The support openings 6281 are formed along the The third support seat 628 is provided in the second direction, and the right end of the support opening 6281 is not closed. The second pivot part 520 can be pressed from the right end of the support opening 6281 to enter the support opening 6281. The second pivot part 520 is rotatably installed in the support opening 6281 and is rotatably supported by the third support base 628. The second pivot part 520 can rotate around a rotation axis perpendicular to the first direction. In this embodiment, the rotation axis of the second pivot part 520 is parallel to the second direction. In other embodiments, the second pivot part 520 The axis of rotation can also be in other directions.

Optionally, the second end 120 of the box body 100 is provided with a blocking column 1203 integrally formed, and the blocking column 1203 protrudes leftward from the second end 120 along the first direction. When the second pivot portion 520 of the detected component 500 is installed into the support opening 6281 and the second protective cover 620 is fastened on the second end 120, the blocking column 1203 blocks the right end opening of the support opening 6281, so that The second pivot part 520 is prevented from falling off from the support opening 6281.

The slider 490 is fixedly installed on one end of the translator 420 facing the second end 120 , and the end of the translator 420 facing the second end 120 extends out of the box 100 . The slider 490 includes an integrally formed main body portion 492 , an extension portion 493 , a second guide portion 494 and a pushing protrusion 491 . The main body 492 is provided with a fixing hole 4921 for the left end of the translation member 420 to pass through. The left end of the translation member 420 is provided with a buckle that can produce elastic deformation in the radial direction of the translation member 420 . After the translator 420 is inserted into the fixing hole 4921, the buckle deforms elastically. When the left end of the translator 420 extends out of the fixing hole 4921, the elastic deformation of the buckle disappears and the fixing hole 4921 is buckled to prevent the slider 490 from falling off the translator 420. The extension portion 493 is integrally formed and extends downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 492. The left end of the extension portion 493 is integrally connected to the second guide portion 494. The second guide portion 494 has a central axis parallel to the first direction. On the outer circumferential surface, the second protective cover 620 is integrally provided with a second guide track 626 . The second guide track 626 has an inner circumferential surface that matches the outer circumferential surface of the second guide portion 494 . The guide 494 may be in the second guide track 626 along the first direction sliding and is restricted to movement in the first direction. The right end of the extension part 493 is integrally connected to the push protrusion 491. The front end of the push protrusion 491 is provided with a push slope 4911, and the front end of the push slope 4911 is higher than the rear end. In this embodiment, the number of the resisting protrusions 491 is one. In other embodiments, the number of the resisting protrusions 491 may be two or more. The sliding block 490 can move together with the translating member 420.

The first arm 510 is integrally connected to the right side of the second pivot part 520, the second arm 530 is integrally connected to the left side of the second pivot part 520, and the second protective cover 620 is provided with a hole for the second arm. 530 extends out of window 622. The first arm 510 is provided with a matching slope 511 that matches the pushing slope 4911, so that the contact and power transmission between the first arm 510 and the pushing protrusion 491 are smoother. The second protective cover 620 is also integrally provided with a mounting plane 627 , and a fourth elastic member 760 is fixedly installed on the mounting plane 627 . The fourth elastic member 760 is located below the first arm 510 . When the object to be detected 500 is in the detection position, the pushing protrusion 491 contacts the first arm 510 and the second arm 530 contacts the detection component in the image forming device and pushes the detection component to cause displacement of the detection component, thereby generating electricity in the image forming device. Signal. When the object to be detected 500 is in the non-detection position, the second arm 530 is in contact with the detection element, but the second arm 530 cannot move the detection element to a position where an electrical signal is generated in the image forming apparatus. The fourth elastic member 760 is used to place the detected piece 500 in a non-detection position, and the detection piece can rotate from the non-detection position to the detection position under the action of the pushing protrusion 491 . In this embodiment, the fourth elastic member 760 is a sponge. In other embodiments, the fourth elastic member 760 may also be a compression spring or other parts.

Optionally, the developing device conductive member 910 includes a first electrical contact portion 911 and a second electrical contact portion 912. The first electrical contact portion 911 is in contact with and electrically connected to the second protective cover 620, and the second electrical contact portion 911 is in contact with and electrically connected to the second protective cover 620. The portion 912 is in contact with the powder feeding roller 260 and is electrically connected. The second arm 530 of the object to be detected 500 is in contact with and electrically connected to the power supply terminal in the image forming device, thereby receiving power and transmitting the power to the second protective cover 620 through the third support base 628, and the second protective cover 620 passes through The first electrical contact part 911 transmits power to the conductive member 910, the conductive member 910 transmits power to the powder feeding roller 260 through the second electric contact part 912, and the powder feeding roller 260 transmits power to the developing roller 210, so that the developing roller 210 and The powder feeding rollers 260 each receive voltage provided by the image forming device.

Schematically, the translation member 420 has a first position and a second position. When the translation member 420 is located at the first position, it is further to the right than when it is located at the second position. When the developing device is in the factory default state, the translating member 420 is in the first position; after the detection process of the developing device is completed, the translating member 420 is in the second position.

During the movement of the translation member 420 from the first position to the second position, the slider 490 receives the power transmitted by the translation member 420 and moves to the left along the first direction along with the translation member 420. At the same time, in the second position The cooperation of the guide portion 494 and the second guide rail 626 allows the slider 490 to move only in the first direction. Push the protrusion 491 and follow The sliding block 490 moves to the left together, so that the pushing slope 4911 on the pushing protrusion 491 contacts the matching slope 511 on the first arm 510, so that the first arm 510 swings downward around the second pivot part 520 and The fourth elastic member 760 is pressed to produce elastic deformation, and the first arm 510 swings downward to cause the second pivot part 520 to drive the second arm 530 to swing upward, thereby causing the second arm 530 to push the detection component in the image forming device. And the detection element is moved to a position that generates an electrical signal in the image forming device, thereby causing an electrical signal to be generated in the image forming device, thereby causing the image forming device to determine that the developing device is a new developing device. Because if the developing device has been used, the translation member 420 has moved to the second position without external interference, and the translation member 420 cannot continue to move, so the detected piece 500 cannot receive the information transmitted by the translation member 420. The image forming device moves due to the power of the image forming device, so that the image forming device cannot generate electrical signals.

In other embodiments, the number of the pushing protrusions 491 may be two or more, with intervals provided between the plurality of pushing protrusions 491 , and each pushing protrusion 491 can push the first arm 510 when passing through the first arm 510 . The arm 510 is pressed down once, causing the second arm 530 to swing upward once, thereby causing an electrical signal to be generated in the image forming device. According to the number of times the electrical signal is generated, the image forming device can determine more information about the developing device (such as model, model, etc.) capacity, life), and the time interval between two adjacent electrical signals can be adjusted by adjusting the size of the interval between adjacent push protrusions 491, and the detection position of the detected part 500 can be adjusted by adjusting the size of the push protrusion 491 The holding time and adjusting the above parameters can enable the image forming device to determine different information related to the developing device, which can greatly expand the richness of the information, allowing the detection component to record more information related to the developing device and provide it to The image forming device facilitates the image forming device to determine the information of the developing device and display it to the user, such as remaining life, old and new, whether the model of the developing device matches the model of the image forming device, etc., thereby improving the user experience.

The detected component 500 provided in this embodiment is also suitable for other developing devices with a translational component 420, and the translational component 420 does not rotate relative to the box body.

Example 4

As shown in FIGS. 32 to 41 , this embodiment provides a developing device, which is different from the developing device provided in the above embodiments in that the structure of the transmission unit is different.

As shown in Figures 34 and 35, in one possible implementation, the transmission unit, in addition to the transmission member and the first rotating member 410, also includes a support member 470 installed on the first end 110, and the first rotating member 410 is sleeved On the support member 470, at least one of the first rotating member 410 and the support member 470 has a separation slope intersecting the first direction, and the third A rotating member 410 and the supporting member 470 are connected through a separation slope, so that the first rotating member 410 can be displaced relative to the box 100 in the first direction. A first transmission protrusion 417 is provided on the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating member 410 .

The separation slope may be provided only on the inner peripheral surface of the first rotating member 410 , or the separation slope may be provided only on the outer peripheral surface of the support member 470 . In other embodiments, separation slopes may be respectively provided on the inner peripheral surface of the first rotating member 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the supporting member 470 .

With this structure, when the first rotating member 410 rotates relative to the box body 100, under the action of the separation slope, the first rotating member 410 can be displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, and then the first rotating member 410 can interact with the transmission The assembly is disengaged from the transmission to complete the detection process of the developing device 1 .

Continuing to refer to Figures 34 and 35, a threaded portion 471 is provided on the outer circumferential surface of the support member 470, the separation slope is provided on the threaded portion 471, and a threaded portion 471 is provided on the inner circumferential surface of the first rotating member 410. The first protruding rib 4109 is threadedly connected to the threaded portion 471 .

The first protruding rib 4109 can extend into the interior of the threaded portion 471 and move along the extending direction of the threaded portion 471 . As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 , the support member 470 forms a hollow cylindrical structure, and the support member 470 is fixedly connected to the first end 110 of the box body 100 . The first rotating member 410 is movably disposed on the supporting member 470. The supporting member 470 can support the first rotating member 410 to rotate thereon and at the same time allow the first rotating member 410 to move axially thereon. Specifically, the main body part of the first rotating member 410 forms a cylindrical structure that is sleeved outside the support member 470 , and the inner diameter of the cylindrical structure is larger than the outer diameter of the support member 470 . The support member 470 is also provided with a fixed arm 472 that can be fixedly connected to the first end 110 of the box 100 , that is, the support member 470 is fixedly connected to the first end 110 through the fixed arm 472 . The first transmission protrusion 417 is provided on the outer wall of the first rotating member 410 , and the first transmission protrusion 417 is located at an end of the main body portion of the first rotating member 410 close to the first end 110 . Illustratively, the power receiving device 320 can drive the first rotating member 410 to rotate relative to the box body 100 .

In other embodiments, the threaded portion 471 can also be provided on the inner wall of the main body of the first rotating member 410 , and the first rib 4109 can be provided on the outer surface of the supporting member 470 , which can also realize axial movement of the rotating member on the supporting member 470 .

With this structure, when the first protruding rib 4109 extends into the threaded portion 471, the threaded portion 471 can guide and limit the first protruding rib 4109. The first rotating member 410 can stably displace relative to the box body 100 in the first direction when rotating.

Please continue to refer to Figures 34 and 35. The transmission assembly includes a stirring gear 310 that is rotatably mounted on the first end 110. The developing assembly includes a stirring shaft 220 that is rotatably mounted on the box body 100. The stirring shaft 220 is disposed through the support member 470. The stirring gear 310 is located on the side of the first rotating member 410 away from the first end 110 and is fixedly connected to the stirring shaft 220. A connecting rod 419 is protruding from one end of the first rotating member 410 away from the first end 110. The stirring gear 310 is provided with The through opening 311 for the connecting rod 419 to extend into.

It can be understood that the support member 470 is sleeved on the outside of the stirring shaft 220, and the support member 470 does not rotate together with the stirring shaft 220. The through opening 311 is located on the stirring gear 310 at a position away from the rotation axis, and the through opening 311 extends along the axial direction of the stirring gear 310 . It can be understood that the first rotating member 410 is located on a side of the stirring gear 310 facing the first end 110 , and the connecting rod 419 also extends along the axial direction of the stirring gear 310 . The stirring gear 310 and the first rotating member 410 have a first connection state and a second separation state. Specifically, in the first connection state, the stirring gear 310 rotates to drive the first rotating member 410 to move so that the first rotating member 410 approaches The first end 110 of the box body 100 moves. In the second separated state, the first rotating member 410 does not make any movement following the rotation of the stirring gear 310, and the two are in a separated state.

In this structure, the first rotating member 410 and the stirring gear 310 can be connected through the mutual cooperation between the connecting rod 419 and the through hole 311 , that is, the stirring gear 310 can drive the first rotating member 410 to move relative to the box body 100 . When the first rotating member 410 moves until the connecting rod 419 is disengaged from the through opening 311, the first rotating member 410 is disengaged from the stirring gear 310 to complete the detection of the developing device.

In a possible implementation, the first transmission protrusion 417 is a block-shaped structure protruding on the outer wall of the first rotating member 410. The transmission member includes a swinging member 430 that is pivotably installed on the box body 100. A transmission protrusion 417 is configured to push one end of the swinging member 430 to drive the swinging member 430 to swing relative to the box body 100 .

The box body 100 is provided with a swing groove 156 on which the swing member 430 can move. The swing groove 156 is provided with a first rotation axis 157 around which the swing member 430 can rotate and swing. The first rotation axis 157 is at The swing groove 156 protrudes outward, and the swing rod has an axis hole that matches the first rotation shaft 157 . Of course, the rotating shaft can also be arranged on the swing rod, and the swing groove 156 is provided with a shaft hole for the rotating shaft to be inserted. The swing grooves 156 are arranged oppositely in the second direction. Specifically, the swing grooves 156 extend toward the first end 110 of the box body 100 and simultaneously extend toward the fourth end 140 of the box body 100 . The swing grooves 156 extend toward the first end 110 of the box body 100 . The two ends 120 extend toward the third end 130 of the box body 100 at the same time. The swing axis of the swing member 430 intersects with any tangent line on the rotation trajectory of the first rotating member 410 . The swinging member 430 is provided with second protruding ribs 437. There are two second protruding ribs 437, which are respectively disposed on both sides of the first rotation axis 157 on the swinging member 430 to enhance the structural stability of the swinging rod.

Optionally, as shown in Figure 33, the first protective cover 610 is provided with a first limiting member 615 capable of limiting one end of the swinging member 430, and the second protective cover 620 is provided with a first limiting member 615 capable of limiting the other end of the swinging member 430. The second limiting member 621 for limiting can ensure that the swinging member 430 always moves within the swinging groove 156 .

The end of the swinging member 430 located at the first end 110 of the box body 100 is provided with a first end 438 that can abut against the first transmission protrusion 417. The first end 438 is provided in a circular shape that can abut against the first transmission protrusion 417. Arc surface.

In this structure, when the first rotating member 410 rotates, the block-shaped first transmission protrusion 417 interferes with the end of the swinging member 430, thereby driving the swinging member 430 to swing relative to the box body 100, so that the detected piece 500 is relative to the box body. 100 movement, so that the image forming device can obtain the information of the developing device.

The difference between this embodiment and the above embodiment is that the transmission member includes a swing member 430 that is pivotally installed on the box body 100 , and the detected component 500 is fixedly installed on the other end of the swing member 430 .

As shown in FIGS. 32 to 41 , the detected part 500 is disposed at one end of the swinging part 430 at the second end 120 of the box 100 , and the detected part 500 is located on the side of the swinging part 430 . The detected part 500 and the swinging part 430 One piece. In other embodiments, the detected component 500 can also be fixed on the swinging component 430 by bonding or tightening with fasteners. The object to be detected 500 includes a sloped portion 506 and a curved portion 505 . One end of the sloped portion 506 is connected to the swinging member 430 , and the other end of the sloped portion 506 is connected to the curved portion 505 . During the movement of the detected object 500, the curved portion 505 can be directly detected by the detection device in the image forming device. The outer surface of the curved portion 505 is an arc surface to protect the detection device when in contact with the detection device and increase its service life.

Through the above arrangement, when the swing member 430 swings relative to the box body 100, the detected piece 500 and the swing member 430 move synchronously, and the transmission structure is simple and stable.

The detected component 500 provided in this embodiment is also applicable to other developing devices having a swing component 430 .

The working principle of the developing device provided by this embodiment is as shown in Figures 36 to 41. The developing device is fixed to the drum assembly and installed into the image forming device together. The power receiving device 320 receives the driving force from the image forming device. rotation, the developing gear 330, powder feeding gear 340 and idler gear 350 meshed with the power receiving device 320 rotate respectively. The developing gear 330 drives the developing roller 210 to rotate, the powder feeding gear 340 drives the powder feeding roller 260 to rotate, and the idler gear 350 drives the powder feeding roller 260 to mesh with it. The stirring gear 310 rotates. In the initial position, as shown in Figures 36 and 37, there is a first connection state between the stirring gear 310 and the first rotating member 410, and the connecting rod 419 of the first rotating member 410 is always in the through hole 311 of the stirring gear 310. When the stirring gear 310 rotates, it drives the first rotating member 410 to rotate. Since the first rib 4109 of the first rotating member 410 cooperates with the threaded portion 471 of the supporting member 470, the first rotating member 410 faces the box on the supporting member 470. The first end 110 of 100 moves axially.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 , when the first rotating member 410 rotates, the first transmission protrusion 417 abuts against the arc surface of the first end 438 , and the first rotating member 410 further moves toward the box body 100 . When one end 110 moves, the first transmission protrusion 417 pushes the first end 438 to move toward the rear of the box 100, causing the swing member 430 to swing around the first rotation axis 157, thereby driving the detected piece 500 to move to the detection position, and then Detected for the first time.

As the stirring gear 310 rotates, as shown in Figures 39 and 40, the first transmission protrusion 417 leaves the first end 438, the detected part 500 and the swing rod are reset, and the first end 438 moves from the rear of the box 100 Move toward the front of the box 100 . When the first rotating member 410 further moves toward the first side of the box 100, the first rotating member 410 moves away from the stirring gear 310 during axial movement, so that the stirring gear 310 and the first rotating member 410 are in a second separation. state, that is, the connecting rod 419 of the first rotating member 410 is detached from the through opening 311 of the stirring gear 310, and the two are in a separated state. At this time, the first transmission protrusion 417 once again pushes the first end 438 toward the rear of the box 100, causing the swing member 430 to swing again around the first rotation axis 157, thereby driving the detected piece 500 to move to the detection position, completing the first step. The secondary detection completes the detection process of the developing device, and the information of the developing device is also transmitted to the image forming device, so that the developing device can be used normally.

Reset operation: It is necessary to take out the developing device and drum assembly from the image forming device, and then remove the first protective cover 610 from the first end 110 of the box body 100. At this time, the transmission assembly is exposed, and then reversely rotate the first rotation by hand. Part 410, re-insert the connecting rod 419 on the first rotating part 410 into the through opening 311 of the mixing gear 310, and try to make the rotating part as close to the mixing gear 310 as possible, and reinstall the first protective cover 610 to the box body 100. Complete the reset process.

Example 5

As shown in Figures 42-53, the difference between this embodiment and Embodiment 4 is that the structures of the transmission member and the first rotating member 410 are different.

In a possible implementation, the first transmission protrusion 417 is an annular structure protruding on the outer wall of the first rotating member 410. The transmission member includes a translational member 420 extending along the first direction. The translational member 420 can Displacement occurs relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, and the first transmission protrusion 417 resists one end of the translation member 420 .

The first transmission protrusion 417 extends along the radial direction of the first rotating member 410 toward the axis direction away from the first rotating member 410 . In this embodiment, the connecting rod 419 is disposed on the side of the main body of the first rotating member 410 facing the stirring gear 310; of course, the connecting rod 419 can also be disposed on the first transmission protrusion 417, which is not uniquely limited here. The stirring gear 310 and the first rotating member 410 have a first connection state and a second separation state, with In the first connected state, the rotation of the stirring gear 310 drives the first rotating member 410 to move so that the first rotating member 410 moves close to the first end 110 of the box 100. In the second separated state, the first rotating member 410 It does not follow the rotation of the stirring gear 310 to make any movement, and the two are in a separated state.

The translation member 420 forms a rod-shaped structure extending along the first direction. The box body 100 is provided with a second chute 158 that allows the translation member 420 to move within it. The second chute 158 is provided with a structure that can prevent translation. There are two second limiting parts 1581 from which the component 420 is separated. In this embodiment, the second chute 158 is a recessed groove provided on the surface of the box body 100, and two ends of the recessed groove are respectively provided with translational openings. There are through holes through which the member 420 passes, and the positions of the two through holes each form a second limiting portion 1581. The portion of the translation member 420 located at the first end 110 of the box body 100 is provided with a first driven portion 421 that can abut with the first transmission protrusion 417 .

With this structure, when the first rotating member 410 rotates relative to the box body 100, the first rotating member 410 is synchronously displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, and the first transmission protrusion 417 on the first rotating member 410 pushes the translational member 420 Displacement occurs relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, causing the detected component 500 to move relative to the box body 100 so that the image forming device can obtain information about the developing device.

Illustratively, the developing device further includes a turning protrusion 1211, which is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction as the translation member 420 moves. The object to be detected 500 is driven by the turning protrusion 1211 to be displaced in a direction crossing the first direction.

With this structure, the translation member 420 drives the steering protrusion 1211 to move when it moves. The steering protrusion 1211 drives the detected component 500 to move relative to the box 100 , so that the image forming device can obtain information about the developing device.

As shown in Figures 45 to 53, a second protective cover 620 is provided on the second end 120, and a window 622 is provided on the second protective cover 620. The component to be detected 500 penetrates the window 622 and is slidably connected to the second protective cover 620. ; The steering protrusion 1211 is provided at one end of the translational member 420 facing the second end 120. The detected piece 500 is provided with a first matching protrusion 560. At least one of the turning protrusion 1211 and the first matching protrusion 560 has an inclination relative to the first direction. On the third transmission surface 1221, the turning protrusion 1211 is used to push the first matching protrusion 560 to drive the detected piece 500 to slide.

The second protective cover 620 is detachably mounted on the second end 120 of the box body 100 . The part to be detected 500 extends out of the window 622. The second protective cover 620 is located at the window 622 and is provided with a first guide part 623 capable of guiding the movement of the part to be detected 500. The part to be detected 500 is provided with a first guide part 623. 623 fits the first limiting groove 507.

Exemplarily, the part of the translation member 420 located at the second end 120 of the box body 100 is connected to a driving arm 4210 that can drive the detected piece 500 to move in the first guide part 623. The driving arm 4210 includes a first connecting arm 42101. and a second connecting arm 42102 connected to the first connecting arm 42101. The first connecting arm 42101 and the second connecting arm 42101 of the box body 100 The end surfaces of the end 120 are substantially parallel, the second connecting arm 42102 extends in a direction away from the second end 120 , and the steering protrusion 1211 is provided on the upper end surface of the second connecting arm 42102 . The first matching protrusions 560 are provided on the lower end surface of the component to be detected 500. The number of the first matching protrusions 560 can be set as needed. For example, as shown in Figure 46, they can be provided on the lower end surface of the component to be detected 500. Two first matching protrusions 560, in this way, when the translational member 420 drives the steering protrusion 1211 to move, it can drive the detected member 500 to move up and down along the first guide part 623 twice, that is, it is detected twice by the detection device in the image forming device. . It is worth mentioning that the third transmission surface 1221 can be provided only on the steering protrusion 1211 or only on the first matching protrusion 560, or the third transmission surface 1221 can be provided on the steering protrusion 1211 and the first matching protrusion 560 respectively. .

With this structure, when the translation member 420 is displaced relative to the box 100 in the first direction, the steering protrusion 1211 will interfere with the first matching protrusion 560, causing the detected piece 500 to move from the non-detection position through the third transmission surface 1221. to the detection position.

When the two first matching protrusions 560 are provided on the lower end surface of the detected component 500 and the translation member 420 moves from the first end 110 toward the second end 120 in the first direction, the steering protrusion 1211 on the second connecting arm 42102 first The movement against the first first fitting protrusion 560 causes the detected object 500 to move from the non-detection position to the detection position, and then be detected for the first time. When the steering protrusion 1211 moves between the two first matching protrusions 560 , the object to be detected 500 moves from the detection position to the non-detection position, and the detection circuit in the image forming device stops generating electrical signals. As the translation member 420 continues to move, the steering protrusion 1211 of the second connecting arm 42102 moves against the second first matching protrusion 560, so that the detected piece 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position, and then is detected for the second time. detected. When resetting, it is necessary to take out the developing device and the drum assembly from the image forming device, and move the detected component 500 to disengage the first matching protrusion 560 from the steering protrusion 1211. At this time, push the driving arm 4210 toward the second end of the box 100 120 moves, the first matching protrusion 560 returns to the position in contact with the first steering protrusion 1211, and the reset is completed.

In a possible implementation, the developing device further includes a fourth elastic member 760. The fourth elastic member 760 is connected to the detected component 500. The fourth elastic component 760 is configured to drive the detected component 500 to move to the non-detection position. The fourth elastic member 760 can drive the detected component 500 to a better reset.

In this embodiment, the fourth elastic member 760 may be a spring, and the spring is connected between the upper end surface of the detected component 500 and the second protective cover 620 . In other embodiments, the gravity of the detected part 500 itself can be used to cause the detected part 500 to move from the detection position to the non-detection position when the first fitting protrusion 560 is disengaged from the turning protrusion 1211 .

The detected component 500 provided in this embodiment is also suitable for other developing devices with a translational component 420, which does not rotate relative to the box body.

The working principle of the developing device provided by this embodiment is as follows: the developing device is fixed to the drum assembly and installed into the image forming device together. The power receiving device 320 receives the driving force from the image forming device and starts to rotate. The developing gear 330, the powder feeding gear 340 and the idler gear 350 rotate respectively. The developing gear 330 drives the developing roller 210 to rotate, the powder feeding gear 340 drives the powder feeding roller 260 to rotate, and the idler gear 350 drives the stirring gear 310 meshed with it to rotate. In the initial position When, as shown in Figures 48 and 49, there is a first connection state between the stirring gear 310 and the first rotating member 410. The connecting rod 419 of the first rotating member 410 is always in the through hole 311 of the stirring gear 310, and the stirring When the gear 310 rotates, it drives the first rotating member 410 to rotate. Since the first rib 4109 of the first rotating member 410 cooperates with the threaded portion 471 of the supporting member 470, the first rotating member 410 faces the box 100 on the supporting member 470. The first end 110 moves axially, so that the first transmission protrusion 417 abuts the first driven portion 421 . When the rotating member further moves toward the first end 110 of the box body 100, as shown in Figures 50 and 51, the first transmission protrusion 417 pushes the first driven portion 421 to move toward the second end 120 of the box body 100, thereby pushing The translation member 420 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, so that the detected component 500 moves relative to the box body 100 . As shown in Figures 52 and 53, as the stirring gear 310 rotates, the first rotating member 410 further moves toward the first side of the box 100, and the first rotating member 410 moves away from the stirring gear 310 when moving axially. The stirring gear 310 and the first rotating member 410 are in a second separation state, that is, the connecting rod 419 of the first rotating member 410 is detached from the through hole 311 of the stirring gear 310, and the two are in a separated state. At this time, the detected component The position of 500 is fixed, the detection process of the developing device is completed, and the information of the developing device is also transmitted to the image forming device, so that the developing device can be used normally.

Reset operation: It is necessary to take out the developing device and drum assembly from the image forming device, and then remove the first protective cover 610 from the first end 110 of the box body 100. At this time, the transmission assembly is exposed, and the first rotating member is rotated in the reverse direction by hand. 410, reinsert the connecting rod 419 on the first rotating member 410 into the through hole 311 of the stirring gear 310, and at the same time reset the detected component 500 to complete the reset.

Example 6

As shown in FIGS. 54 to 61 , this embodiment provides a developing device that can be detachably installed on the drum assembly of the image forming device.

In a possible implementation, the transmission assembly includes a stirring gear 310 that is rotatably mounted on the first end 110 . In addition to the first rotating member 410 and the translating member 420 , the transmission unit also includes a second rotating member that is rotatably mounted on the first end 110 . The rotating member 450 , the stirring gear 310 meshes with the second rotating member 450 , and the second rotating member 450 is drivingly connected to the first rotating member 410 .

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 , the second rotating member 450 includes a second mounting hole 455 , an engaging section 4101 and a notch section 4102 . The second rotating member 450 is rotatably and fixedly installed on the first end 110 of the box body 100 through the second mounting hole 455, and the second rotating member 450 can be limited by screws or other auxiliary components to prevent it from being removed from the box body 100. fall off. The meshing section 4101 has teeth arranged around part of the circumference of the second rotating member 450. The meshing section 4101 and the notch section 4102 are jointly arranged around the circumference of the second rotating member 450, that is, the second rotating member 450 is an incomplete gear. The meshing section 4101 of the second rotating member 450 can mesh with the stirring gear 310 and cause the second rotating member 450 to follow the stirring gear 310 to rotate. When the notch section 4102 faces the stirring gear 310, the second rotating member 450 is disengaged from the stirring gear 310. And no longer follow the stirring gear 310 to rotate.

The first rotating member 410 is also rotatably mounted on the first end 110 of the box 100. The first rotating member 410 is provided with a first mounting hole 4105, and the first rotating member 410 is rotatably fixed on the first rotating member 410 through the first mounting hole 4105. The first end 110 of the box 100. The first rotating member 410 can be limited by screws or other auxiliary components to prevent it from falling off the box body 100 . For example, the first rotating member 410 may be drivingly connected to the second rotating member 450 through gear meshing or belt transmission.

In this embodiment, the position of the transmission member on the box body 100 can be set as needed. When the power receiving device 320 receives power and rotates, the power is transmitted to the stirring gear 310 through the driving gear 322, and the stirring gear 310 drives the second rotating member. 450 rotates, the second rotating member 450 drives the first rotating member 410 to rotate relative to the box body 100. When the first rotating member 410 rotates, the translational member 420 moves relative to the box 100, and the translational member 420 drives the detected component 500 to move relative to the box 100. The cartridge 100 moves so that the image forming device can acquire information about the developing device.

In a possible implementation, a first transmission protrusion 417 is provided on a side of the first rotating member 410 facing the first end 110 , and a first transmission surface is provided on the transmission protrusion 417 .

As shown in Figures 55 to 57, there are multiple first transmission protrusions 417. For example, as shown in Figure 57, three first transmission protrusions 417 can be provided on the side of the first rotating member 410 facing the first end 110. , the three first transmission protrusions 417 form an annular structure on the first rotating member 410 . One of the first transmission protrusions 417 is formed with a second flat portion 4171. The second flat portion 4171 has a first end H1 and a second end H2 in the circumferential direction. The end surface of the second flat portion 4171 facing the first end 110 is a flat section. The arc surface, that is, the distance from each point on the end surface of the second flat portion 4171 close to the first end 110 in the first direction to the first end 110 in the first direction is the same. In other embodiments, each point on the end surface of the second flat portion 4171 close to the first end 110 in the first direction is in the first direction. The distance up to the first end 110 may also vary. Each first transmission protrusion 417 is provided with a tip, and a recess is formed between two adjacent first transmission protrusions 417 . The distance between the second flat part 4171 and the first end 110 in the first direction is less than the distance between the recess and the first end 110 , and the distance between the second flat part 4171 and the first end 110 in the first direction is greater than the distance between the tip and the first end 110 . The distance from the end 110 , the second flat portion 4171 , the tip and the recess all face the first end 110 . In other embodiments, the distance between the second flat portion 4171 and the first end 110 in the first direction may not be greater than the distance between the tip and the first end 110 . In this embodiment, there are three concave positions and three tips, namely the first concave position B1, the second concave position B2 and the third concave position B3, the first tip T1, the second tip T2 and the third tip T3. The position B1, the second concave position B2 and the third concave position B3 are at the same distance from the first end 110 in the first direction, and the first tip T1, the second tip T2 and the third tip T3 are at the same distance from the first end 110 in the first direction. The distance between ends 110 is the same. In other embodiments, the distance between the third tip T3 and the first end 110 in the first direction may be different from the distance between the first tip T1 and the second tip T2 and the first end 110 in the first direction. The number of first transmission surfaces is three. The three first transmission surfaces are respectively the first inclined surface K1 located between the first recess B1 and the first tip T1, and the first inclined surface K1 located between the second recess B2 and the second tip T2. The second inclined surface K2 between the third concave position B3 and the third tip T3 is located between the second inclined surface K2 and the third inclined surface K3 between the third concave position B3 and the third tip T3. The extension direction of the three inclined surfaces is to cross the first direction and to be away from the first end 110 along the Z direction. direction, that is, taking the first inclined surface K1 as an example, the upstream end of the first inclined surface K1 in the Z direction is closer to the first end 110 in the first direction than the downstream end. The Z direction is the first rotating member 410 direction of rotation. The angle between the third inclined surface K3 and the first direction is smaller than the angle between the first inclined surface K1 and the first direction, and the angles between the first inclined surface K1 and the second inclined surface K2 and the first direction are the same. This embodiment does not impose restrictions on the concave positions and tips, and the number, length, shape, and inclination of the inclined surface of the concave positions and tips on the first rotating member 410 can be set according to actual needs. In addition, there is a fixed position H3 on the first rotating member 410. The fixed position H3 is groove-shaped. In the first direction, the distance from the fixed position H3 to the first end 110 is equal to the distance from the second flat portion 4171 to the first end 110. The distance is the same. In this embodiment, the first rotating member 410 is divided into the following sections according to the positions of the tip and the recess: the first end H1 to the second end H2 is the first stage, and the second end H2 to the first recess B1 is the second stage. , the first concave position B1 to the first tip T1 is the third stage, the first tip T1 to the second concave position B2 is the fourth stage, the second concave position B2 to the second tip T2 is the fifth stage, and the second tip T2 The sixth stage is from the third concave position B3, the seventh stage is from the third concave position B3 to the third tip T3, and the eighth stage is from the third tip T3 to the fixed position H3.

As shown in FIGS. 54 to 61 , the upper cover 170 of the box body 100 includes a first slide groove 172 , a first limiting part 173 and a movable groove 174 . The first chute 172 extends along the first direction, and in the second direction, the first chute 172 is closer to the fourth end 140 than the third end 130 . In this embodiment, the number of first limiting parts 173 is two, and the two first limiting parts 173 The portions 173 are respectively provided at both ends of the first slide groove 172 . The number of movable slots 174 is also two. The two movable slots 174 are respectively close to the first end 110 and the second end 120 of the box 100 in the first direction. That is, the two movable slots 174 are respectively located at the two first limiting positions. One end of the portion 173 is away from the first slide groove 172 . Each first limiting part 173 has a limiting through hole penetrating the first slide groove 172 and the movable groove 174 in the first direction. In the second direction, the radius of the first limiting part 173 and the radius of the movable groove 174 is larger than the radius of the first slide groove 172. This embodiment does not limit the number and shape of the limiting part and the movable groove 174. Actual requirements change.

As shown in Figures 54, 61 and 62, the translation member 420 is located at the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 and is detachably installed on the upper cover 170. The translation member 420 can move left and right in the first direction. Displacement occurs relative to the box in the first direction. The translation member 420 includes an integrally formed first rod portion 428 and a first driven portion 421. The first rod portion 428 is at least partially installed on the first slide groove 172. The translation member 420 is protected by two first limiting portions 173. Limiting to prevent the translation member 420 from falling off the first chute 172, and at the same time, the first rod portion 428 can move left and right in the first direction through the limiting through hole, that is, the first rod portion 428 is partially located in the first chute 172 The portion through the limiting through hole is located in the two movable grooves 174 . In this embodiment, the first driven part 421 is a block. The first driven part 421 is close to the first end 110 of the box 100 and is connected to an end of the first rod part 428 close to the first end 110. The first driven part 421 is close to the first end 110 of the box 100. The portion 421 is located in the movable groove 174 near the first end 110 and can move relative to the movable groove 174. The radius of the first driven portion 421 in the first direction is greater than the radius of the first chute 172, so the first driven portion 421 can prevent the translation member 420 from being separated from the upper cover 170 when moving in the first direction. A second driven end 4211 is provided on the side of the first driven part 421 away from the first rod part 428. The second driven end 4211 may be partially located in the movable groove 174 or not located at all in the movable groove 174. The driving end 4211 is movable relative to the movable groove 174 in the first direction. The second driven end 4211 is an arc-shaped protrusion of the first driven portion 421 extending to the right in the first direction, and the second driven end 4211 is used to abut the first rotating member 410 . Since the first rotating member 410 is rotatable, the second driven end 4211 can contact the second flat portion 4171, the tip and the concave position on the first rotating member 410 in sequence. The second driven end 4211 includes a second contact arc surface 42111 and a second contact end 42112, where the second contact arc surface 42111 is equivalent to the first transmission surface. The contact position between the second driven end 4211 and the first driven part 421 is the starting position of the arc surface. The starting position extends to the right along the first direction and forward along the second direction to form a second contact arc surface 42111. The second contact arc surface 42111 is a smooth arc surface, and the second contact arc surface 42111 is used to contact the inclined surface on the first rotating member 410 . The second contact arc surface 42111 in the first direction, the second contact end 42112 is located at the rightmost end of the second driven end 4211, and is also located at the rightmost end of the entire translation member 420. The second contact end in the first direction End 42112 is always outside the active slot 174. The second contact end 42112 is connected to the second contact arc surface 42111. The connecting end 42112 is a smooth arc-shaped end. The smooth arc surface and arc-shaped end can reduce the friction force when the second driven end 4211 contacts the first rotating member 410, so that the second driven end 4211 and the first transmission protrusion on the first rotating member 410 417 and the recessed positions between two adjacent first transmission protrusions 417 are more smoothly contacted and switched. The contact positions between the second contact end 42112 and the first rotating member 410 are all contact points.

The third elastic member 750 is set on the translation member 420 , and the third elastic member 750 is located in the sliding groove 4441 on the side of the first sliding groove 172 facing the first end 110 . One end of the third elastic member 750 is in contact with the wall formed by the first limiting part 173 and the movable groove 174 , and the other end is in contact with the first driven part 421 , that is, the third elastic member 750 is located in the first slide groove 172 toward the third Between the first limiting portion 173 on one side of the one end 110 and the first driven portion 421 . When the first driven part 421 receives the contact force of the first rotating member 410 in the first direction, the translation member 420 moves to the left, and the third elastic member 750 is compressed. When the upward contact force weakens or disappears, the translation member 420 moves to the right according to the elastic force of the third elastic member 750 itself.

With this structure, when the first rotating member 410 rotates relative to the box body 100, the interference between the first transmission protrusion 417 on the first rotating member 410 and the translating member 420 drives the translating member 420 to face each other in the first direction. The box body 100 is displaced, thereby driving the detected piece 500 to move relative to the box body 100 .

In a possible implementation, the transmission unit further includes a linkage rod 460 connected between the second rotating part 450 and the first rotating part 410. One end of the linkage rod 460 is rotationally connected to the second rotating part 450, and the other end is connected to the second rotating part 450. The first rotating member 410 is rotationally connected.

The second rotating member 450 is provided with a second connecting hole 454, and the second connecting hole 454 and the second mounting hole 455 are spaced apart in the radial direction. A first connecting hole 4108 is provided on the first rotating member 410, and the first connecting hole 4108 and the first mounting hole 4105 are radially spaced apart.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 58 , the linkage rod 460 includes an integrally formed first linkage part 461 , a second linkage part 462 and a connecting body 463 . The first linkage part 461 and the second linkage part 462 are columnar protrusions extending in the first direction from the connection body 463 to the direction close to the first end 110 . The first linkage part 461 and the second linkage part 462 are respectively located on the connection body. The two ends of 463. The first linkage part 461 includes two first elastic blocks 4611. The two first elastic blocks 4611 are symmetrically arranged around the first linkage part 461. The first elastic block 4611 has a first protrusion part 46112. The first protrusion part 46112 is a first The elastic block 4611 extends outward of the circumference. The first guide surface 46111 is an inclined surface on the first protrusion 46112. The extension direction of the first guide surface 46111 is inclined to the first direction and away from the circumference of the first linkage part 461. The second linkage part 462 includes two second elastic blocks 4621. The two second elastic blocks 4621 are symmetrically arranged around the second linkage part 462. The second elastic blocks 4621 have a second protruding part 46212. The second protrusion 46212 is formed by the second elastic block 4621 extending outward of the circumference. The second guide surface 46211 is an inclined surface on the second protrusion 46212. The extension direction of the second guide surface 46211 is inclined with the first direction and away from the second direction. The two linkage parts 462 are in the circumferential direction. In other embodiments, both the first linkage part 461 and the second linkage part 462 may be made of elastic material.

As shown in Figure 59, the first linkage portion 461 of the linkage rod 460 can be inserted into the second connection hole 454 of the second rotating member 450 using the first guide surface 46111 of the first elastic block 4611, and the first protruding portion 46112 restricts it to prevent it from falling off, and the second rotating member 450 can rotate relative to the first linkage part 461. The second linkage part 462 can use the second guide surface 46211 of the second elastic block 4621 to be inserted into the first connection hole 4108 of the first rotating member 410, and use the second protrusion 46212 to limit it to prevent it from falling off. The member 410 can rotate relative to the second linkage portion 462 . The linkage rod 460 serves as the linkage device between the second rotating member 450 and the first rotating member 410. When the second rotating member 450 meshes with the stirring gear 310 and follows the stirring gear 310 to rotate in the Z direction, the first rotating member 410 passes through the linkage rod 460. It also follows the rotation of the second rotating member 450 in the Z direction synchronously.

Illustratively, the developing device further includes a first elastic member 730. One end of the first elastic member 730 is connected to the first rotating member 410. The first elastic member 730 is configured to drive the first rotating member 410 to rotate. By providing the first elastic component 730, the first rotating member 410 can be prevented from reversing.

As shown in Figures 60 and 61, the upper cover 170 also includes a support rod 1701. The support rod 1701 extends in a first direction from the side wall of the upper cover 170 close to the first end 110 of the box 100 to a direction away from the first end 110. . The first elastic component 730 is sleeved on the support rod 1701. The first elastic component 730 may be a torsion spring. One end of the first elastic member 730 is in contact with the side wall of the upper cover 170 near the first end 110 , and the other end is in contact with the first rotating member 410 , and the first elastic member 730 can exert a first force on the first rotating member 410 . The force to rotate the rotating member 410 in the Z direction. Since the second rotating member 450 and the first rotating member 410 will move in the Z direction relative to the linkage rod 460, the second connecting hole 454 and the second mounting hole 455 of the second rotating member 450 and the second connecting hole 455 of the first rotating member 410 will appear. When the first connecting hole 4108 and the first mounting hole 4105 are located on the same straight line, in this case, the first rotating member 410 may reverse, that is, the first rotating member 410 may rotate in the opposite direction to the Z direction. The elastic force exerted by the first elastic component 730 on the first rotating member 410 can prevent the first rotating member 410 from being reversed in this situation.

During operation of the developing device provided by this embodiment: the first rotating member 410 abuts the translational member 420 to cause the translational member 420 to move to the left in the first direction, and the third elastic member 750 releases the elastic force to cause the translational movement. The component 420 moves to the right in the first direction. When the translation component 420 moves, it drives the detected component 500 to move relative to the box body 100 .

Install the developing device into the image forming device. When the developing device does not start working, that is, when the power receiving device 320 does not receive the power output from the image forming device, the second rotating member 450 is in the initial position and the meshing section 4101 is meshed with the stirring gear 310; The first rotating member 410 is in contact with the second driven end 4211 of the translation member 420, where the second contact end 42112 is contacted at the first end H1 of the second flat portion 4171, and the third elastic member 750 In a compressed state; the detected piece 500 is located at the detection position. The first elastic member 730 is in a deformed state and exerts a force on the first rotating member 410 to rotate the first rotating member 410 in the Z direction. However, since the first rotating member 410 is linked with the second rotating member 450 through the linkage rod 460, the first rotating member 410 is linked with the second rotating member 450. The two rotating members 450 are meshed with the stirring gear 310, so when the power receiving device 320 does not receive the power transmitted from the image forming device, the first rotating member 410 does not rotate although it is affected by the elastic force of the first elastic member 730.

When the power receiving device 320 receives the power output from the image forming device and starts to rotate and drives the stirring gear 310 to rotate, the second rotating member 450 follows the stirring gear 310 and starts to rotate in the Z direction, and the first rotating member 410 follows the second rotation through the linkage rod 460 The member 450 starts to rotate, and at the same time, the elastic force of the first elastic member 730 on the first rotating member 410 is released. The elastic force of the first elastic member 730 on the first rotating member 410 can prevent the first rotating member 410 from rotating in the opposite direction to the Z direction. , so that the first rotating member 410 always follows the second rotating member 450 to rotate in the Z direction, that is, the rotation of the first rotating member 410 is jointly affected by the elastic force of the first elastic component 730 and the rotational force transmitted by the second rotating member 450 through the linkage rod 460 .

As the first rotating member 410 rotates, the first end H1 of the second flat portion 4171 abuts the second contact end 42112 and gradually rotates to the second end H2 abuts the second abutment end 42112. During the process from H1 to the second end H2, that is, during the process when the second contact end 42112 is contacted by the entire second flat portion 4171, the translation member 420 does not move, and the detected member 500 is always in the detection position.

In the process of rotating from the second end H2 abutting the second abutment end 42112 to the first concave position B1 abutting the second abutment end 42112, that is, the process of the second abutment end 42112 abutting in the second stage, The second contact end 42112 loses the contact force exerted by the first rotating member 410, and is affected by the elastic force of the third elastic member 750. The translation member 420 moves the detected component 500 to the right in the first direction from the detection position to the second contact end 42112. Undetected positional motion. The translation member 420 stops moving to the right after the second contact end 42112 is contacted by the first concave position B1. At this time, the detected member 500 is in the non-detection position.

The first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, and the second driven end 4211 is no longer contacted by the first concave position B1, but is contacted by the first inclined surface K1 between the first concave position B1 and the first tip T1. The first tip T1 gradually rotates close to the second contact end 42112. When the first inclined surface K1 abuts the second driven end 4211 and the first tip T1 is close to the second During the process of the driven end 4211, that is, the process of the second contact end 42112 contacting in the third stage, the translation member 420 moves left in the first direction, and the detected member 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position. When the second contact end 42112 receives the first tip T1, the translation member 420 stops moving to the left, and the detected member 500 is located at the detection position.

The contact process of the second driven end 4211 in the fourth and sixth stages is consistent with the contact process of the second driven end 4211 in the second stage. The translation member 420 moves to the right in the first direction, and the detected member 500 Move from the detection position to the non-detection position.

The contact process of the second driven end 4211 in the fifth and seventh stages is consistent with the contact process of the second driven end 4211 in the third stage. The translation member 420 moves left in the first direction, and the detected member 500 Move from the non-detection position to the detection position. The difference is that since the angle between the third inclined surface K3 and the first direction is smaller than the angle between the first inclined surface K1 and the first direction, the angle between the first inclined surface K1 and the second inclined surface K2 and the first direction is large. same. Therefore, the contact time of the second driven end 4211 by the third inclined surface K3 is shorter than the contact time by the first inclined surface K1 and the second inclined surface K2. The speed at which the translation member 420 moves left in the first direction Faster, and thus the detected object 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position faster.

When the second rotating member 450 rotates until the gap section 4102 is opposite to the stirring gear 310, the second rotating member 450 is disengaged from the stirring gear 310 and no longer rotates. The elastic force released by the deformation of the first elastic component 730 is exhausted. Therefore, the first The rotating member 410 loses the rotating force exerted on it by the second rotating member 450 and the elastic force exerted on it by the first elastic component 730. The second contact end 42112 abuts on the fixed position H3 of the first rotating member 410 and prevents rotation. The detection member 500 is maintained at the detection position, thereby completing the detection and the developing device operates normally.

In other embodiments, in order to prevent the first rotating member 410 from continuing to rotate due to the incomplete release of the elastic force of the first elastic member 730 after the second rotating member 450 is separated from the stirring gear 310, a limit may also be set on the first rotating member 410. The limiting member interferes with the box body 100 to prevent it from continuing to rotate.

In this embodiment, when the second contact end 42112 moves to contact the first tip T1, the second tip T2, and the third tip T3, the detected piece 500 is exactly at the detection position. In other embodiments, it can also be configured that when the second contact end 42112 moves to any point on the first inclined surface K1, the second inclined surface K2, and the third inclined surface K3, the detected piece 500 enters the detection position. .

In order to meet the detection requirements of the image forming device, the length, number and shape of the second flat portion 4171 on the first rotating member 410 can be set according to the specific requirements of the image forming device.

Through the above process, the image forming device can detect the information of the developing device (such as different models, different capacity, condition, etc.).

In a possible implementation, the other end of the translation member 420 is provided with a clamping portion 425 , the detected piece 500 is rotationally installed on the second end 120 , and one end of the detected piece 500 is provided with a clamping portion 425 connected to the clamping portion 425 . The clamped part 540 and the detected part 5007 are provided at the other end of the detected part 500, and there is an included angle between the rotation axis of the detected part 500 and the first direction.

As shown in Figures 61 and 62, schematically, the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 is provided with an upper cover 170, and the upper cover 170 is provided with assembly holes 171. In this embodiment, the number of the assembly holes 171 is two. , the two assembly holes 171 are symmetrically arranged in the third direction. When the translation member 420 includes the first rod portion 428 , the clamping portion 425 is located at the second end 120 of the box body 100 and is connected to an end of the first rod portion 428 close to the second end 120 .

For example, the component to be detected 500 includes a mounting protrusion 521 and a base plate 522. The number of the mounting protrusions 521 may be two. The two mounting protrusions 521 are above and below the base plate 522 in the third direction. The component to be detected 500 can be supported by the upper cover 170 by inserting the two mounting protrusions 521 into the two mounting holes 171 of the upper cover 170 respectively. The component to be detected 500 can use the mounting protrusions 521 as a pivot point to move in the first direction and the second direction. It pivots in the R or L direction relative to the upper cover 170 in a plane composed of two directions. In this embodiment, the rotation axis of the detected component 500 extends along the third direction. In other embodiments, the rotation axis of the detected component 500 may also have an included angle with the first direction and the third direction respectively. The clamped portion 540 is connected to the clamping portion 425 of the translator 420 . The detected part 5007 is used to contact the detection member in the image forming apparatus, so that the developing device is detected in the image forming apparatus. When the translation member 420 moves left and right in the first direction, the clamped portion 540 of the detected piece 500 is pushed to the left or pulled to the right by the translation member 420 , so that the detected piece 500 follows the translation member. 420 rotates with the mounting protrusion 521 as a pivot point, so that the detected portion 5007 can be in contact with or out of contact with the detection member in the image forming device.

Optionally, as shown in Figures 146 and 147, a transmission hole 4202 is provided at the left end of the translation member 420, a transmission column 4203 is provided in the transmission hole 4202, and a fourth support is integrally formed on the second end 120 of the box body 100. The fourth support seat 1204 is provided with a pivot hole 12041, and the component to be detected 500 is rotatably mounted on the fourth support seat 1204. The detected part 500 includes a detected part 5007, a base plate 522 and a clamped part 540. The base plate 522 is provided with a mounting protrusion 521 extending along the second direction. The mounting protrusion 521 can pivot around an axis parallel to the second direction. Installed in the pivot hole 12041 on the fourth support base 1204. The detected portion 5007 is integrally formed with the substrate 522, and the clamped portion 540 is integrally formed with the substrate 522. The detected portion 5007 is used with a detection piece in the image forming apparatus. Contacting and exerting force on the detection piece causes the detection piece to move. The clamped portion 540 includes a driven groove 541 , and the transmission column 4203 extends into the driven groove 541 and is in sliding fit with the driven groove 541 .

When the translation member 420 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, the detected piece 500 can be driven to rotate along the rotation axis synchronously, that is, the detected piece 500 can be at the detection position and position along with the translation of the translation member 420 . Rotate between non-detection positions. The part to be detected 500 is rotatably mounted on the second end 120 so that the space required for the part to be detected 500 is smaller, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the developing device and the image forming device, and the operation of the part to be detected 500 is relatively stable, making the detection process less likely to occur. error signal.

The detected component 500 provided in this embodiment can also be used in other developing devices with a translational component 420 , but the translational component 420 does not rotate relative to the box body 100 .

Example 7

Except for special instructions, the structure of the developing device in this embodiment is the same as that in Embodiment 6. The main differentiating features of this embodiment are that the structure of the first rotating member 410 in this embodiment is optimized, and the working mode of the first elastic component 730 is changed.

In a possible implementation, as shown in Figures 63 to 67, the first rotating member 410 is provided with a connecting column 41016, and the axis of the connecting column 41016 is on the same straight line as the rotation axis of the first rotating member 410. The elastic component 730 is against the side wall of the connecting post 41016. A pre-force block 41017 is protruding from the side wall of the connecting post 41016. The pre-force block 41017 is configured to be against the first elastic component 730.

As shown in Figures 63 and 64, according to the functions of each part of the first rotating member 410, this embodiment divides the first rotating member 410 into a contact part 410A and a non-contact part 410B. The contact part 410A includes and Example 13 has the same plurality of first transmission protrusions 417. The non-contacting portion 410B includes a connecting post 41016, a first connecting hole 4108, a first mounting hole 4105 and a pre-force block 41017. The abutting portion 410A surrounds the non-contacting portion 410A in the radial direction. Section 410B. The first rotating member 410 is connected to the linkage rod 460 through the first connecting hole 4108 so that the first rotating member 410 can rotate following the second rotating member 450 . The connecting column 41016 is formed by the first rotating member 410 extending in the first direction toward the first end 110. The first mounting hole 4105 penetrates the entire connecting column 41016 and the entire first rotating member 410 in the first direction. The member 410 is rotatably and fixedly installed on the first end 110 of the box body 100 through the first mounting hole 4105. The connecting column 41016 has an outer surface, and the prestressing block 41017 is a block in which the connecting column 41016 extends outward from the outer surface of the connecting column 41016 in the radial direction. The prestressing block 41017 includes a first side 41018 and a second side 41019. One side 41018 and the second side 41019 are two opposite surfaces on the prestressing block 41017.

As shown in Figures 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the first elastic component 730 is provided at the first end 110 of the box 100. The first elastic component 730 includes a fixing part 731 and a pre-force part 732. The pre-force part 732 is The fixing part 731 extends backward along the second direction. After the first elastic component 730 is fixedly installed on the first end 110 of the box 100 through the fixing part 731, the pre-forced part 732 contacts the first rotating member 410 to pre-force it. The portion 732 contacts the first rotating member 410 and deforms to form a first angle α with the second direction. In the third direction, the end of the pre-forced portion 732 close to the fixed portion 731 is lower than the end far away from the fixed portion 731 , and then As the first rotating member 410 rotates, the size of the first angle α between the pre-forced part 732 and the second direction also changes accordingly, and the distance between the two ends of the pre-forced part 732 in the third direction also changes accordingly.

The developing device is installed to the image forming device. When the power receiving device 320 does not receive the power output from the image forming device, the pre-forced portion 732 abuts the outer surface of the connecting post 41016 of the first rotating member 410. At this time, during the first rotating In the rotation direction of the member 410, that is, in the Z direction, the pre-force portion 732 is located upstream of the pre-force block 41017. There is a first included angle α between the pre-force portion 732 and the second direction, and the first included angle α has a first angle. . After the power receiving device 320 receives the power output from the image forming apparatus, the power is transmitted through the stirring gear 310. The second rotating member 450 rotates following the stirring gear 310 and causes the first rotating member 410 to start rotating through the linkage rod 460. It can be seen that when the first rotating part 410 follows the second rotating part 450 to rotate through the linkage rod 460, the second rotating part 450 and the first rotating part 410 also rotate in the Z direction relative to the linkage rod 460.

As shown in Figures 66 and 67, as the first rotating member 410 rotates following the second rotating member 450, the pre-forced part 732 first contacts the outer surface of the connecting column 41016. At this time, the pre-forced part 732 and the second The first included angle α between the directions remains unchanged. As the first rotating member 410 rotates, the pre-forced part 732 no longer contacts the outer surface of the connecting column 41016, but the pre-forced block 41017 moves from the Z direction along the Z direction. The pre-force portion 732 rotates downstream to a position in contact with the pre-force portion 732 , so that the pre-force portion 732 contacts the first side 41018 of the pre-force block 41017 . When the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, the pre-forced portion 732 remains in contact with the first side 41018 of the pre-forced block 41017, and the first angle α between the pre-forced portion 732 and the second direction gradually increases. When the pre-forced part 732 contacts the outer surface of the connecting column 41016 to the first side 41018 of the pre-forced block 41017, the second rotating member 450 and the first rotating member 410 are also relative to each other along the Z direction. The linkage rod 460 rotates. When the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate so that the first side surface 41018 contacts the pre-force part 732 and the second side surface 41019 contacts the pre-force part 732, the first included angle α reaches the maximum value, that is, the first The included angle α has a second angle, and at the same time, the second connecting hole 454 and the second mounting hole 455 of the second rotating member 450 and the first connecting hole 4108 and the first mounting hole 4105 of the first rotating member 410 are located on the same straight line, and The second rotating member 450 has the possibility of reversing. In order to prevent the first rotating member 410 from reversing, When rotating, the pre-forced portion 732 contacts the second side 41019 to exert an elastic force with component force in the Z direction on the first rotating member 410, so that the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate in the Z direction. The first rotating member 410 continues to rotate in the Z direction, the pre-forced portion 732 contacts the outer surface of the connecting column 41016 again, and the first included angle gradually decreases to the first angle. When the second rotating member 450 no longer rotates, the first rotating member 410 no longer rotates either.

Through the above arrangement, when the second connecting hole 454 and the second mounting hole 455 of the second rotating member 450 and the first connecting hole 4108 and the first mounting hole 4105 of the first rotating member 410 are located on the same straight line, it is the first rotation. The member 410 provides a pre-force that can cause the first rotating member 410 to continue to rotate in the Z direction, so that the abutment between the translation member 420 and the first rotating member 410 proceeds smoothly, thus ensuring the smooth completion of the entire detection process.

Example 8

This embodiment provides a developing device. The difference from the above embodiment is that the structures of the first rotating member 410 and the transmission member are different.

In a possible implementation, as shown in Figures 68-78, the first rotating member 410 is provided with a first transmission protrusion 417. The first transmission protrusion 417 is used to contact the transmission member and drive the transmission member relative to the box body. 100 movements occurred.

For example, the first transmission protrusion 417 may be provided on the first rotating member 410 through an integral molding process.

In this structure, the first transmission protrusion 417 is provided on the first rotating member 410. When the first rotating member 410 rotates relative to the box body 100, the first transmission protrusion 417 may interfere with the transmission member, causing the transmission member to move relative to the box body. 100 moves, and the movement of the transmission member causes the detected piece 500 to move relative to the box body 100, so that the image forming device can obtain information about the developing device.

Illustratively, the transmission member includes a translation member 420 extending along the first direction. One end of the translation member 420 is provided with a first driven portion 421 for contacting the first transmission protrusion 417. The first driven portion 421 is connected to the first driven portion 421. At least one of the transmission protrusions 417 has a first transmission surface intersecting in the first direction.

The translation member 420 extends along the first direction, and the first driven portion 421 is located at one end of the translation member 420 facing the first end 110 . When the first rotating member 410 rotates relative to the box body 100, the first driven part 421 interferes with the first transmission protrusion 417. Under the action of the first transmission surface, the first transmission protrusion 417 exerts a force on the first driven part 421. The component force along the first direction drives the translation member 420 to displace in the first direction relative to the box body 100 . It is worth mentioning that the first transmission surface can be provided only on the first transmission protrusion 417 or only on the first driven portion 421, or it can be provided on the first transmission protrusion 417 and the first driven portion 421 respectively. Set the first transmission surface.

In a possible implementation, the first rotating member 410 is provided with a cylindrical section 418, the first transmission protrusion 417 is provided on the circumferential surface of the cylindrical section 418, and the first transmission protrusion 417 is provided with a first transmission surface. .

For example, as shown in FIGS. 68-75 , an inwardly concave first groove 4181 is provided on the circumferential surface of the cylindrical section 418 , and the first transmission protrusion 417 is disposed in the first groove 4181 . The end of the first driven part 421 extends into the first groove 4181. The first groove 4181 is configured to drive the translation member 420 to displace relative to the box body 100 in the first direction when the first rotating member 410 rotates. .

68-75 show that the first rotating member 410 also includes a gear portion 4104 and a first mounting hole 4105. The first mounting hole 4105 penetrates the gear portion 4104 and the cylindrical section 418. The gear portion 4104 is larger than the gear portion 4104 in the first direction. Barrel section 418 is further away from first end 110 . The gear portion 4104 is provided with a meshing section 4101 and a notch section 4102. The meshing section 4101 has teeth arranged around the circumference of the gear section 4104. The meshing section 4101 can mesh with the stirring gear 310 so that the first rotating member 410 as a whole follows the movement of the stirring gear 310. However, when the notch section 4102 is opposite to the stirring gear 310, the first rotating member 410 is out of mesh with the stirring gear 310, and the first rotating member 410 does not rotate following the stirring gear 310. The first groove 4181 is provided on the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical section 418 and is recessed inward along the radial direction of the cylindrical section 418. The first groove 4181 is closer to the box body 100 than the gear portion 4104 in the first direction. End 110. The first groove 4181 is arranged around the circumference of the cylindrical section 418, and the first groove 4181 extends in the circumferential direction of the circumferential surface of the cylindrical section 418. The number of the first transmission protrusions 417 can be multiple, and each first transmission protrusion 417 can be disposed on the barrel section 418 through an integral molding process. The plurality of first transmission protrusions 417 cause the first groove 4181 to have a bend in the axial direction of the cylindrical section 418, that is, the first groove 4181 has a plurality of groove positions located at different positions in the first direction. The lengths of the grooves in the circumferential direction may be inconsistent. The grooves are connected by an inclined plane whose extension direction intersects with the first direction, that is, a first transmission surface or a straight plane whose extension direction is parallel to the first direction, and each inclined plane is connected to the first direction. The angles of inclination are different. For example, the A7 groove position is closer to the gear part 4104 than the A1 groove position in the first direction, the A6 groove position is farther from the gear part 4104 in the first direction than the A1 groove position, and A1 and A9 The groove position is located between the groove positions A3 and A4 in the first direction, but the positions of the groove positions A1 and A9 in the first direction are also different. In this embodiment, in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410, the entire first groove 4181 is divided into the following sections according to the change of the groove position in the first direction. The A1 groove position to the A2 groove position is the first section. One groove section, the A2 groove position to the A3 groove position is the second groove section, the A3 groove position to the A4 groove position is the third groove section, and the A4 groove position to the A5 groove position is the fourth groove section. Groove section, A5 groove position to A6 groove position is the fifth groove section, A6 groove position to A7 groove position is the sixth groove section, A7 groove position to A8 groove position is the seventh groove section , A8 groove position to A9 groove position are the eighth groove segment. The first groove section is a regular groove section around the circumference, and the first groove section is along the cylindrical section 418. The arc surface extending in the circumferential direction, that is, the position of the first groove segment in the first direction does not change relative to the gear portion 4104; the second groove segment, the fourth groove segment and the sixth groove segment are the same type of groove segment. The groove segments, that is, the groove positions arranged along the N direction, the upstream and downstream groove positions in the first direction are closer to the gear portion 4104 than the upstream groove positions, and the second groove segment, the fourth groove segment and the sixth groove segment are along the extending in a direction parallel to the first direction; the third groove segment, the fifth groove segment and the seventh groove segment are the same type of groove segments, that is, the grooves arranged along the N direction are concave upstream and downstream in the first direction. The groove position is further away from the gear portion 4104 than the upstream groove position. The third groove segment, the fifth groove segment and the seventh groove segment have inclined surfaces whose extension direction intersects with the first direction and are away from the gear portion 4104 along the N direction. The inclined surfaces There is an included angle with the first direction, the included angle between the inclined surface in the third groove section and the first direction is α1, and the included angle between the inclined surface in the fifth groove section and the first direction is α2, The angle between the inclined surface in the seventh groove section and the first direction is α3, and α1=α2>α3. The N direction is opposite to the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410 . This embodiment does not impose fixed restrictions on the direction of the first groove 4181 around the circumference of the cylindrical section 418, the position and number of grooves on the first groove 4181, and can be set according to actual needs.

Figure 76 shows that the first support column 720 is provided on the first protective cover 610. Specifically, the first support column 720 is the first support column 720 from the inner wall of the first protective cover 610 in the first direction and in the direction close to the first end 110. Extended and formed, the first rotating member 410 can be inserted into the first supporting column 720 through the first mounting hole 4105 so that the first rotating member 410 is supported by the first protective cover 610 , and the first rotating member 410 can be relative to the first supporting column 720 Rotation, that is, the first rotating member 410 is rotatably installed on the first protective cover 610 .

Figure 77 shows that the main difference between the translation member 420 provided in this embodiment and the translation member 420 in Embodiment 4 is that the end of the first driven part 421 away from the first rod part 428 is provided with a second driven end. 4211, the second driven end 4211 is formed by the first driven part 421 first extending to the right in the first direction and then extending downward in the third direction. The second driven end 4211 is located on the box body 100 in the first direction. In addition, the second driven end 4211 only moves in the first direction. The second driven end 4211 can extend into the first groove 4181 on the first rotating member 410 in the third direction, and be located at each groove position in the first groove 4181 according to the rotation of the first rotating member 410. Being contacted by the first groove 4181, the second driven end 4211 is moved in the first direction, and the contact between the second driven end 4211 and the first groove 4181 is a smooth contact. It is worth mentioning that the first rod portion 428 is also covered with a third elastic member 750, and the third elastic member 750 is used to drive the translation member 420 to move to the right.

In this structure, through the cooperation between the first transmission protrusion 417 in the first groove 4181 and the end of the first driven part 421, the first rotary member 410 can drive the translation member 420 relative to the box along the first direction when rotating. Body 100 Movement.

After the developing device is installed into the image forming device, when the power receiving part 321 has not yet received the power output from the image forming device, that is, the first rotating member 410 has not rotated, the second driven end 4211 is located in the first groove 4181 and At the A1 groove position, the third elastic member 750 is always in a compressed state and exerts a force to move the first driven part 421 to the right in the first direction, while the second driven end 4211 is located in the first groove 4181 and It is contacted by the first groove 4181 in the first direction, thereby blocking the first driven part 421 from being driven by the elastic force of the third elastic member 750 to move the translation member 420 to the right in the first direction. At this time, the detected member 500 is in Detect location. As the first rotating member 410 rotates, the second driven end 4211 will be in different groove positions in the first groove 4181. When the second driven end 4211 is located in the first groove section of the first groove 4181, the translation member 420 does not move, and the detected member 500 is always in the detection position.

As the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, the second driven end 4211 is no longer contacted by the A2 groove position, and the A3 groove position begins to approach the second driven end 4211. When the A3 groove is close to the second driven end 4211, since the second driven end 4211 loses the contact force of the first groove 4181 on the second driven end 4211 in the first direction, the second driven end 4211 Under the influence of the elastic force of the third elastic member 750, the end 4211 moves to the right in the second groove section along the first direction. At the same time, the translation member 420 also moves to the right in the first direction and causes the detected component 500 to move from the detection position to the right. Undetected positional motion. When the second driven end 4211 is located at the A3 groove position, the second driven end 4211 is again subjected to the contact force exerted by the first groove 4181 in the first direction and stops moving to the right. At this time, the detected component 500 is in a non-positive position. Detect location.

Affected by the rotation of the first rotating member 410, the second driven end 4211 is no longer located at the A3 groove position, and the A4 groove position begins to approach the second driven end 4211, and is close to the second driven end 4211 at the A4 groove position. During the process, the second driven end 4211 is abutted in the third groove section. When the second driven end 4211 is abutted by the A3 groove position, it does not move in the first direction. The second driven end 4211 When contacting the first transmission surface, the third groove section moves left along the first direction. At the same time, the translation member 420 also moves left in the first direction and causes the detected component 500 to move from the non-detection position to the detection position. , at this time the third elastic member 750 is compressed.

The movement of the second driven end 4211 in the fourth groove section and the sixth groove section is consistent with the movement in the second groove section, and the translation member 420 moves to the right in the first direction and is detected The piece 500 moves from the detection position to the non-detection position. The movement of the second driven end 4211 in the fifth groove section and the seventh groove section is consistent with the movement in the third groove section. When the second driven end 4211 contacts the straight surface, it moves in the first direction. No movement occurs. When the second driven end 4211 contacts the first transmission surface, it moves leftward in the first direction in the third groove section. At the same time, the translation member 420 also moves leftward in the first direction and is detected. The piece 500 is moved from the non-detection position to the detection position. move. The difference is that since the angle α1=α2>α3, the second driven end 4211 is contacted by the first transmission surface in the seventh groove section for a shorter time, that is, the second driven end 4211 is in the first direction. The upward and left movement time is shorter, and the movement speed of the detected piece 500 is accelerated, that is, the time for the detected piece 500 to move to the detection position is shorter.

As the first rotating member 410 rotates, when the second driven end 4211 is located at the A9 groove position, the notch section 4102 of the first rotating member 410 faces the stirring gear 310, the first rotating member 410 stops rotating, and the detected piece 500 is always at the detection position. It can be seen that the direction, distance, speed and number of movements of the translation member 420 are determined by the internal structure of the first groove 4181, and the direction, distance, speed and number of movements of the translation member 420 determine the direction of movement of the detected component 500. Distance, speed and times.

As shown in FIG. 78 , in other embodiments, in order to save the structure and material of the developing device, the third elastic member 750 can be eliminated and the first groove 4181 can be optimized. The first groove 4181 has a groove wall 41811 away from the gear portion 4104. The groove wall 41811 surrounds the entire circumference in an irregular direction. Taking the N direction as the benchmark, the groove wall 41811 can be divided into multiple grooves according to the different directions of the groove wall 41811. Wall segments, such as C1 to C2, are regular along the N direction; C2 to C3 are across the first direction and close to the gear portion 4104 along the N direction; C2 to C3 are smooth arc surfaces or slopes. ; C3 to C4 are irregular directions that first approach the gear portion 4104 and then move away from the gear portion 4104 along the N direction. C3 to C4 are smooth arc surfaces; C4 to C5 are those that intersect with the first direction and move away from the gear portion 4104 along the N direction. The direction of the gear portion 4104 is a smooth arc or slope between C4 and C5. It can be seen that all directions in the groove wall 41811 are not parallel to the first direction. The second driven end 4211 completely moves to the left or right in the first direction according to the direction of the groove wall 41811 and the contact of the groove wall 41811, thereby causing the detected part 500 to move between the detection position and the non-detection position.

When the developing device is taken out from the image forming device, the detected member 500 and the first rotating member 410 can be manually adjusted to reset, so that the developing device is in a non-detecting state.

Through the above process, the image forming device can detect the information of the developing device (such as different models, different capacities, newness, etc.) by detecting changes in the movement speed of the object 500 to be detected, the number of touches, the length of intervals, etc. ), and facilitates the reset of the detected part 500.

Example 9

As shown in Figures 79-86, the difference between this embodiment and Embodiment 8 is that the structure of the upper cover 170 and the structure of the first rotating member 410 are improved, and the translational member 420 is eliminated. In this embodiment, both the X direction and the Y direction are perpendicular to the second direction.

In one possible implementation, the first transmission protrusion 417 is provided on a side of the first rotating member 410 facing the first end 110 , and the transmission member includes a swinging member 430 that is pivotably mounted on the box body 100 . The protrusion 417 is configured to drive the swing member 430 to swing around the box body 100 , and at least one of the first transmission protrusion 417 and one end of the swing member 430 has a first transmission surface.

As shown in Figures 79-80, the upper cover 170 includes a first side wall 177 located at the first end 110 of the box body 100, and a second side wall 178 located at the second end 120 of the box body 100. The first side wall 177 is provided with The first support column 720 is integrally formed with the upper cover 170 . The first support column 720 extends from the first side wall 177 in a first direction away from the first side wall 177 . The second side wall 178 is provided with a second support column 780 and a connecting pile 1710 that are integrally formed with the upper cover 170 . The second support column 780 and the connecting pile 1710 both extend from the second side wall 178 in a first direction away from the second side wall 178 . The second support column 780 includes a first mounting part 781 and a first base 782. The first mounting part 781 is further away from the second side wall 178 than the first base 782 in the first direction. The connecting pile 1710 includes a second limiting protrusion 17101, a first connecting portion 17102 and a second base 17103. The first connecting portion 17102 is located between the second limiting protrusion 17101 and the second base 17103 in the first direction. The upper cover 170 is also provided with a receiving groove 179 and a supporting portion 176 located at the rear end of the upper cover 170 . The supporting portion 176 is located in the receiving groove 179 . In the first direction, the support portion 176 is closer to the first side wall 177 than the second side wall 178. Since the first side wall 177 is located at the first end 110 of the box body 100, the second side wall 178 is located at the second end of the box body 100. The end 120 , that is, the support portion 176 is closer to the first end 110 than the second end 120 , that is, the distance from the support portion 176 to the first end 110 is no greater than the distance from the support portion 176 to the second end 120 .

As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83 , there are multiple first transmission protrusions 417 , the first rotating member 410 includes a gear portion 4104 , and the gear portion 4104 is larger than the plurality of first transmission protrusions in the first direction. 417 is further away from the first end 110. The first rotating member 410 also includes a first mounting hole 4105 that passes through the first rotating member 410. The first mounting hole 4105 is installed on the first support column 720 of the upper cover 170, that is, the first rotating member 410 passes through the first mounting hole 4105. It is rotatably installed on the upper cover 170 . The gear part 4104 includes a meshing section 4101 and a notch section 4102. The meshing section 4101 can mesh with the stirring gear 310 so that the first rotating member 410 as a whole rotates with the rotation of the stirring gear 310. However, when the notch section 4102 is opposite to the stirring gear 310, The first rotating member 410 does not rotate following the stirring gear 310 . It can be seen that the arc of the meshing section 4101 and the arc of the notch section 4102 together form a complete circle. The plurality of first transmission protrusions 417 include first contact protrusions 417A, second contact protrusions 417B and third contact protrusions 417C arranged around the circumference of the first rotating member 410 . In this embodiment, the first contact protrusion 417A, the second contact protrusion 417B and the third contact protrusion 417C are each provided with a first transmission surface, and the second contact protrusion 417B and the third contact protrusion 417C are each provided with a first transmission surface. The first transmission surface on the three-contact protrusion 417C is an arc surface, and the first transmission surface on the first contact protrusion 417A is an arc surface from point G to point E. FIG. 83 shows that the first contact protrusion 417A also has an arc surface from point E to point F. Specifically, the distance on the arc from point E to point F is the same as the distance from the rotation axis of the first rotating member 410 . On the arc from point G to point E, the distance from point G to the rotation axis of the first rotating member 410 is The distance is greater than the distance from point E to the rotation axis of the first rotating member 410 . Those skilled in the art can set the angle of the first transmission surface on each first transmission protrusion 417 as needed, so that the swing member 430 can have different swing speeds. In other embodiments, the first transmission surfaces on the first contact protrusion 417A, the second contact protrusion 417B and the third contact protrusion 417C may also be sloped surfaces. Alternatively, the first transmission surface may also be provided at the end of the swinging member 430 .

In this embodiment, the number and shape of the first transmission protrusions 417 are not limited and can be set according to actual needs.

As shown in Figures 79 and 84, the swinging member 430 is located at the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 and is detachably installed on the upper cover 170. The swinging member 430 includes a second rod portion 434, a clamping portion 435 and a second driven portion. Department 433. The second rod portion 434 is located in the receiving groove 179 of the upper cover 170 but does not completely directly contact the bottom of the receiving groove 179 , that is, the swinging member 430 is in a suspended state relative to the receiving groove 179 . The clamping portion 435 is movably combined with the support portion 176 of the upper cover 170 , and the distance from the clamping portion 435 to the first end 110 is no greater than the distance from the second end 120 of the clamping portion 435 . The swinging member 430 can be clamped on the supporting portion 176 by using the snapping portion 435 so that both ends of the swinging member 430 swing in a direction closer to the bottom of the receiving slot 179 and in a direction away from the bottom of the receiving slot 179 , that is, the snapping portion 435 and the supporting portion 176 It can be used as a fulcrum of the swinging member 430 to make the second driven part 433 swing up and down in the Y direction. The second driven part 433 is an end of the swinging member 430 close to the first end 110 of the box body 100. The second driven part 433 is used to contact the first transmission protrusion 417 on the first rotating member 410. Since the first rotating member 410 can rotate following the stirring gear 310, and then the second driven portion 433 can contact the plurality of first transmission protrusions 417 on the cylindrical section 418 in sequence. It is worth mentioning that when the swing member 430 swings relative to the box body 100, the detected piece 500 can be moved relative to the box body 100.

Figures 79 and 84-86 show that the detected part 500 is rotatably mounted on the second end 120, the rotation axis of the detected part 500 is parallel to the first direction, and one end of the detected part 500 is movably connected to the swinging member 430.

The swinging member 430 includes a second rod portion 434, and one end of the second rod portion 434 close to the second end 120 of the box body 100 is a placement end 436. For example, the swing axis of the swing member 430 may be parallel to the second direction, that is, the placement end 436 of the swing member 430 may swing up and down along the X direction in FIG. 84 . 84 shows that the placement end 436 includes a placement platform 4361, an insertion protrusion 4362, a connection protrusion 4363, and an inclined portion 4364. The inclined part 4364 is used to connect the placement platform 4361 and the second rod part 434. There is a block on the placement platform 4361, and the insertion protrusion 4362 is located on the block and extends to the left along the first direction. The connecting protrusion 4363 is located on the inclined portion 4364 The lower surface extends to the right along the first direction, and a limiting block (not shown in the figure) is provided at the end of the connecting protrusion 4363 close to the second end 120 .

As shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 85 , the object to be detected 500 includes a mounting through hole 501 , a movable groove 502 , a placement part 503 and a contact part 504 . The contact portion 504 is used to contact the detection member in the image forming device so that the developing device is recognized by the image forming device. The placement part 503 is in contact with the placement platform 4361 , that is, the placement platform 4361 of the swing member 430 is used to place the detected piece 500 . Exemplarily, the upper cover 170 is provided on the fifth end 150 of the box body 100. The upper cover 170 includes a second side wall 178 located at the second end 120 of the box body 100. The second side wall 178 is provided with a second support column. 780. The second support column 780 has a first mounting portion 781 away from the second side wall 178. The first mounting portion 781 is inserted into the mounting through hole 501, so that the detected component 500 can be supported by the upper cover 170, and the detected component 500 The first mounting portion 781 of the second support column 780 can be used as a rotation point for rotation. The length of the movable groove 502 in the second direction is greater than the length in the third direction. The insertion protrusion 4362 on the swing member 430 can be inserted into the movable groove 502 and move in the movable groove 502 , that is, the insertion protrusion 4362 can be inserted into the movable groove 502 . The groove 502 and the placing part 503 are placed on the placing platform 4361 so that the swinging part 430 is connected to the detected part 500 .

As shown in Figures 80 and 86, the second end 120 of the box body 100 is also provided with a third elastic member 750. The third elastic member 750 can be a tension spring, and the third elastic member 750 can be stretched. A connecting pile 1710 is provided on the second side wall 178 of the upper cover 170. The connecting pile 1710 includes a second limiting protrusion 17101, a first connecting part 17102 and a second base 17103. The first connecting part 17102 is located in the first direction. Between the second limiting protrusion 17101 and the second base 17103, the second base 17103 is connected to the second side wall 178. One end of the third elastic member 750 is connected to the connecting protrusion 4363 on the swinging member 430 and a limiting block is used to prevent the third elastic member 750 from falling off. The other end is connected to the first connecting portion 17102 of the connecting pile 1710. The protrusion 17101 prevents the third elastic member 750 from falling off. Since the upper cover 170 is fixedly installed on the box body 100, the end of the third elastic member 750 connected to the first connecting part 17102 does not move, but the swinging member 430 swings to cause the third elastic member 750 to connect One end of the connecting protrusion 4363 will move, thereby causing the third elastic member 750 to be stretched.

When the placement end 436 of the swing member 430 is in an upward swing state, the detected piece 500 rotates from the non-detection position to the detection position. After the detected piece 500 rotates to the detection position, the contact portion 504 of the detected piece 500 forms an image with the The detection member in the device is in a touching state, and at this time, the third elastic member 750 is in a stretched state.

When the first rotating member 410 stops exerting force on the swinging member 430, the third elastic member 750 uses its own elastic force to return to the unstretched state and drives the placement end 436 of the swinging member 430 to swing downward. At this time, the detected piece 500 moves from The detection position rotates to the non-detection position. After the detected part 500 rotates to the non-detection position, the contact part 504 of the detected part 500 and the detecting part in the image forming apparatus transition from the contact state to the disengaged state.

In this embodiment, during the rotation of the first rotating member 410, interference occurs between the first transmission protrusion 417 on the first rotating member 410 and the second driven portion 433 of the swinging member 430. Under the action, the swinging member 430 is made to swing relative to the box body 100 , thereby causing the detected component 500 to move relative to the box body 100 .

During the operation of the developing device provided in this embodiment, when the developing device is installed into the image forming device but the power receiving part 321 does not start to receive the power transmitted from the image forming device, the engaging section 4101 of the first rotating member 410 and The stirring gear 310 is meshed, and the second driven portion 433 of the swing member 430 abuts at E of the first contact protrusion 417A. At this time, the second driven portion 433 of the swing member 430 is pressed by the first contact protrusion 417A in the third direction. The acting force is in a downward swing state, and at this time, the detected piece 500 is in the detection position.

When the power receiving part 321 starts to receive the power transmitted from the image forming device and transmits the power to the stirring gear 310, the stirring gear 310 starts to rotate, and then the first rotating member 410 meshed with the stirring gear 310 starts to rotate. As the first rotating member 410 rotates, the second driven part 433 moves along the arc formed by E and F from being squeezed at point E to being squeezed at point F. During this process, the swing member 430 The swing state remains unchanged, and the detected piece 500 is always in the detection position.

When the first rotating member 410 rotates until the second driven portion 433 of the swinging member 430 is out of contact with the first contact protrusion 417A, the second driven portion 433 of the swinging member 430 loses its downward swinging force, and the swinging member 430 returns to its original position. , the detected part 500 moves from the detection position to the non-detection position. While the second driven portion 433 is located between the first contact protrusion 417A and the second contact protrusion 417B, the detected piece 500 is in the non-detection position.

When the first rotating member 410 rotates until the second contact protrusion 417B contacts the second driven portion 433, the second driven portion 433 receives the force of the second contact protrusion 417B and follows the arc surface of the second contact protrusion 417B, that is, The first transmission surface gradually swings downward, and the detected piece 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position. When the second driven portion 433 disengages from the second contact protrusion 417B and swings upward, the detected piece 500 moves from the detection position to the non-detection position. Similarly, the contact process between the third contact protrusion 417C and the second driven part 433 is the same as the contact process between the second contact protrusion 417B and the second driven part 433 .

When the first rotating member 410 rotates to the notch section 4102 and the stirring gear 310, the first rotating member 410 no longer rotates, and the second driven part 433 contacts the first contact protrusion 417A again, but at this time the second The driven part 433 no longer contacts point E but contacts point G. The object to be inspected 500 is always at the inspection position until it is developed The device is removed from the image forming apparatus. When the first rotating member 410 no longer rotates and the detected member 500 is located at the detection position, the entire detection process of the development device installation is completed, and the development device begins to work normally.

Example 10

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89 , the difference between this embodiment and Embodiment 2 is that in this embodiment, the first rotating member also serves as a translational member, and is collectively referred to as the first rotating member for convenience of description below.

In one possible implementation, the first end 110 of the box body 100 is provided with an abutment 612. When the transmission unit receives the power of the transmission assembly and generates the first movement, it contacts the abutment 612 and is exerted by the abutment 612. The reaction force produces a second motion.

For example, the first protective cover 610 is detachably installed on the first end 110, and the abutting member 612 can be installed on the first protective cover 610. Specifically, the abutting member 612 can be disposed on the first protective cover through an integral molding process. The cover 610 faces the side of the first end 110 . Schematically, the first movement is that the component of the transmission unit rotates relative to the box body 100 , and the second movement is that the component displaces relative to the box body 100 in the first direction.

With this structure, when the transmission unit generates the first movement, force is applied to the transmission unit through the abutment member 612 so that the transmission unit generates the second movement, and the second movement of the transmission unit is used to drive the detected piece 500 to move relative to the box body 100 .

In a possible implementation, the transmission unit includes a first rotating member 410 extending along a first direction, and the first rotating member 410 is capable of displacing relative to the box body 100 in the first direction. The transmission assembly is configured to drive the first rotating member 410 to rotate. The first rotating member 410 is provided with a first abutting protrusion 412. At least one of the abutting member 612 and the first abutting protrusion 412 has an angle that intersects with the first direction. The first driving surface I1. Wherein, the first driving surface I1 may be an inclined surface inclined in the first direction.

In this embodiment, the first rotating member 410 extends from the first end 110 to the second end 120 of the box 100. When the first rotating member 410 is displaced relative to the box 100 in the first direction, the first rotating member 410 The end facing the second end 120 can drive the detected piece 500 to move relative to the box body 100 .

For example, a recess B is provided on the contact member 612. The first contact protrusion 412 abuts the contact member 612, and the first contact protrusion 412 can extend into the interior of the recess B. The recess B is connected to the first contact protrusion 412. At least one of the contact protrusions 412 has a first driving surface I1 that is inclined relative to the first direction.

Schematically, the contact member 612 is aligned with the first rotating member 410. When the first rotating member 410 rotates relative to the box body 100, the contact member 612 pushes the first rotating member 410 to displace relative to the box body 100 in the first direction. . For example, the recess B may be integrally formed on a side of the abutting member 612 close to the first end 110 . The number of concave positions B can be There are two recesses B, and the two recesses B are separated from each other in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410 . In the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410, one of the concave positions B is located upstream of the other concave position B, and the first contact protrusion 412 on the first rotating member 410 passes through the two concave positions B successively. In this embodiment, the first driving surface I1 is inclined in the first direction, and the first driving surface I1 is provided on the first contact protrusion 412. In other embodiments, the first driving surface can be provided only on each recess B. I1, or the first driving surface I1 may be provided on the first contact protrusion 412 and each recess B respectively.

In this embodiment, the first contact protrusion 412 has a first edge and a second edge that are oppositely arranged, and the first edge is located downstream of the second edge in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410 . In the first direction, the first edge is closer to the first end 110 of the box 100 than the second edge. In the first direction, the recess B is located within the trajectory swept by the first driving surface I1 on the first contact protrusion 412 when it moves. The depth of the recess B located at the downstream and away from the first end 110 of the box body 100 along the first direction is greater than the depth of the recess B located at the upstream recessed along the first direction away from the box body 100 .

In this structure, when the first contact protrusion 412 extends into the recess B, the detected component 500 is in the non-detection position. As the first rotating member 410 rotates, under the action of the first driving surface I1, the recess B The side wall of the first contact protrusion 412 pushes the first contact protrusion 412 out of the recessed position B. At this time, the first rotating member 410 drives the detected component 500 to move from the non-detection position to the detection position. When the detected object 500 moves to the detection position, the detection circuit of the image forming device generates an electrical signal, so that the image forming device can obtain information about the developing device.

In a possible implementation, the developing assembly includes a stirring shaft 220, the transmission assembly includes a stirring gear 310 that is rotatably mounted on the first end 110, the stirring gear 310 is fixedly connected to the stirring shaft 220, and the first rotating parts 410 respectively pass through the stirring shaft. 220 and the stirring gear 310 are provided, and the first rotating member 410 is configured to rotate together with the stirring shaft 220 .

Through the above arrangement, when the power receiving device 320 drives the stirring gear 310 to rotate, the stirring gear 310 drives the stirring shaft 220 and the first rotating member 410 to rotate synchronously. The transmission assembly does not need to set up a separate transmission structure to drive the first rotating member 410 to rotate. It is conducive to simplifying the structure of the transmission assembly, reducing the space occupation of the first end 110 of the box body 100, and being conducive to miniaturization of the developing device.

Optionally, a flat key 41014 is protruding from the first rotating member 410 , and the flat key 41014 is slidably connected to the stirring shaft 220 and/or the stirring gear 310 .

Schematically, the first rod portion 428 of the first rotating member 410 is protruding with a flat key 41014. The flat key 41014 extends along the first direction. The number of the flat keys 41014 can be set according to actual needs and is not uniquely limited here. . The stirring shaft 220 and/or the stirring gear 310 are provided with a keyway that cooperates with the flat key 41014. The flat key 41014 extends into the keyway and is slidingly connected with the keyway. That is to say, the first rotating member 410 is connected to the keyway through the flat key 41014. The coupling is keyed with the stirring shaft 220 and/or the stirring gear 310 . In other embodiments, the flat key 41014 may be located on the first disk portion 411 of the first rotating member 410 .

Through the above arrangement, when the stirring gear 310 rotates, the first rotating member 410 can be driven to rotate synchronously, and the first rotating member 410 can move relative to the box 100 in the first direction.

When the developing device is in the initial state, the first contact protrusion 412 is in the upstream concave position B, and the detected component 500 is in the non-detection position.

When the stirring gear 310 receives the power transmitted by the transmission assembly and rotates in the counterclockwise direction in Figure 88 (shown by the arrow), the first disk portion 411 is driven to rotate counterclockwise together with the stirring gear 310 and the stirring shaft 220, so that The first driving surface I1 on the first contact protrusion 412 is in contact with the side wall of the recess B. Since the first driving surface I1 is a slope, the first contact protrusion 412 receives a reaction force along the first direction, so that the first driving surface I1 is inclined. The contact protrusion 412 drives the first rotating member 410 to move leftward along the first direction, thereby moving the detected member 500 to the detection position, thereby moving the detection member, causing the image forming device to generate an electrical signal.

Then, as the first disk portion 411 continues to rotate, the first contact protrusion 412 rotates in the first direction to be aligned with the downstream recess B. Under the action of the compression spring, the first disk portion 411 moves along the first direction. One direction moves to the right, so that the detected piece 500 moves to a non-detection position. Because the depth of the concave position B located downstream is concave along the first direction away from the first end 110 of the box body 100 is greater than the depth of the concave position B located upstream is concave along the first direction away from the box body 100 , so when the first contact protrusion 412 falls into the downstream concave position B under the action of the elastic member, the flat key 41014 on the first rod 428 slides out of the keyway on the stirring shaft 220 and cannot receive the The torque transmitted from the stirring shaft 220 to the first rod part 428 causes the first rod part 428 to stop rotating, thus ending the detection process of the developing device.

In this embodiment, the electrical signal is only generated once. When the developing device is installed in the image forming device, if the developing device has been used, the first contact protrusion 412 is already in the recess B located downstream, so no electrical signal can be generated. signal, thereby judging whether the developing device is old or new by whether it generates an electrical signal.

In other embodiments, the number of recesses 4111 can also be increased on the contact member 612, thereby increasing the number of times electrical signals are generated.

Compared with Embodiment 1, in this embodiment, one transmission member (ie, a translational member) is removed from the first end 110 of the box body 100 . This can reduce the number of molds required during manufacturing, thereby saving mold opening costs, reducing production costs, simplifying the assembly process, reducing space occupation at the first end 110 of the box body 100, and conducive to miniaturization of the developing device.

Example 11

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 102 , this embodiment discloses a developing device that can be detachably installed on a drum assembly in an image forming apparatus.

This embodiment provides a developing device whose transmission unit includes a first rotating member 410 and a third rotating member 440 . The first end 110 of the box body 100 is provided with a first protective cover 610 , and the developing device includes a contact member 612 provided on the first protective cover 610 . A first protruding portion 6123 is provided on the abutting member 612 . The third rotating member 440 is located outside the first rotating member 410 and is slidingly connected to the first rotating member 410 . The first protruding portion 6123 is configured to connect with the first rotating member 410 In opposition, one end of the first rotating member 410 away from the abutting member 612 is drivingly connected to the detected member 500 .

Schematically, the first rotating member 410 can move along the first direction and is supported by the outer surface of the fifth end 150 of the box body 100. The outer surface of the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 is integrally formed with a second slider. The second sliding groove 158 extends along the first direction. The first rotating member 410 is disposed in the second chute 158. The first rotating member 410 is cylindrical. The first end 110 of the box 100 has a first support hole. The first rotating member 410 passes through the first support hole. And is movably supported by the first support hole, which is aligned with the second slide groove 158 in the first direction.

The portion of the first rotating member 410 extending out of the second slide groove 158 is disposed through the third rotating member 440 . The third rotating member 440 is in the shape of a hollow cylinder, and a gear portion 4104 is integrally formed on the circumferential surface of the third rotating member 440. In this embodiment, the gear portion 4104 is provided with a plurality of teeth (i.e., in this embodiment, the third rotating member 440 may not be configured as an incomplete gear), the gear portion 4104 meshes with the stirring gear 310.

Exemplarily, the first contact protrusion 412 is located on the circumferential surface of the portion of the first rotating member 410 that protrudes from the second chute 158 , and the portion of the first rotating member 410 that protrudes from the second chute 158 is also convex. A sliding key 41421 is provided, and the sliding key 41421 and the first contact protrusion 412 can be disposed on the first rotating member 410 through an integral molding process. The third rotating member 440 is integrally formed with two sliding grooves 4441. One of the sliding grooves 4441 cooperates with the sliding key 41421, and the other sliding groove 4441 cooperates with the first abutting protrusion 412. The sliding key 41421 and the first contact protrusion 412 can respectively move in the first direction relative to the corresponding sliding key 41421. The first contact protrusion 412 is further away from the first end 110 of the box body 100 than the sliding key 41421 in the first direction. The first rotating member 410 is rotatably supported by the third rotating member 440 . The first rotating member 410 can rotate together with the third rotating member 440 .

The first protective cover 610 is detachably and fixedly installed on the first end 110 of the box body 100. The first protective cover 610 covers the transmission assembly to protect the transmission assembly. Optionally, the first protective cover 610 can be fixed to the box body 100 by buckles or fasteners. The first protective cover 610 is integrally provided with a contact member 612 on a side facing the box body 100 in the first direction. The contact member 612 includes an annular portion and is integrally formed with the annular portion and faces the box body in the first direction. The first protruding portion 6123 on one end surface of 100 is provided with a first driving surface I1, and the annular portion is aligned with the first abutting protrusion 412 on the first rotating member 410 in the first direction, The upstream portion of the first driving surface I1 in the rotation direction of the first contact protrusion 412 is further away from the box body 100 than the downstream portion. The first driving surface I1 is used to interfere with the first contact protrusion 412 and thereby provide a first direction force for the first rotating member 410 .

When the power receiving device 320 receives the power output from the image forming device and drives the stirring gear 310 to rotate, the stirring gear 310 can drive the third rotating member 440 to rotate. The first rotating member 410 and the third rotating member 440 rotate synchronously. The interference between the component 612 and the first rotating component 410 causes the first rotating component 410 to displace relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, thereby causing the detected component 500 to move relative to the box body 100, so that the image forming device can acquire the developing device. Information.

In a possible implementation, the transmission unit further includes a translational member 420. One end of the first rotating member 410 away from the abutment member 612 is against one end of the translational member 420, and the other end of the translational member 420 is against the detected piece. 500 transmission connection.

The translation member 420 is in the shape of a cylindrical rod, and the translation member 420 is accommodated in the second slide groove 158 . In the first direction, the translation member 420 has a force-receiving end and a force-applying end. The force-receiving end of the translation member 420 is closer to the first end 110 of the box body 100 than the second end 120 of the box body 100 . The translation member 420 The force-applying end extends beyond the second end 120 of the box body 100 . The first rotating member 410 is aligned with the translating member 420 in the first direction, and an end of the first rotating member 410 away from the first protective cover 610 is in contact with the force-receiving end of the translating member 420 . With this structure, when the first rotating member 410 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, the first rotating member 410 drives the detected component 500 to move relative to the box body 100 through the translational member 420 .

The working process of the developing device in this embodiment is as follows: when the power receiving device 320 receives power and rotates, the power is transmitted to the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 through the driving gear 322, causing the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 to rotate and drive at the same time. The gear 322 transmits power to the stirring gear 310 through the idler gear 350. The stirring gear 310 drives the stirring frame 270 to rotate. The stirring gear 310 drives the third rotating member 440 to rotate. The third rotating member 440 cooperates with the sliding groove 4441 and the sliding key 41421. The first rotating member 410 is driven to rotate. The rotation of the first rotating member 410 causes the first contact protrusion 412 to rotate along the rotation direction with the first rotating member 410. The first contact protrusion 412 moves along the side of the contact member 612 toward the first end 110 and interferes with the first driving surface I1 of the first protrusion 6123, so that the first contact protrusion 412 receives the force provided by the first driving surface I1. The first rotating member 410 is driven to move along the first direction from the first end 110 of the box 100 to the second end 120 of the box 100, and the first rotating member 410 pushes the translational member 420 along the first direction and from The first end 110 of the box 100 moves in the direction of the second end 120 of the box 100 . The first translation member 420 moves the detected member 500 relative to the box 100, so that the image forming device generates an electrical signal, and the image forming device can obtain information about the developing device.

When the used developing device is installed into the image forming device again, since the translation member 420 has moved from the first end 110 of the box body 100 to the second end 120 of the box body 100 to the maximum value, the object to be detected 500 cannot be moved. Movement occurs and the image forming device cannot generate an electrical signal, so it can be determined that the developing device is an old developing device.

As shown in Figures 90 to 93, Figure 97 and Figure 98, the detected part 500 is slidably installed on the second end 120. The second end 120 is provided with a driving member 121 and a second matching protrusion 122. The steering protrusion 1211 is provided on the driving part. On the component 121, the driving component 121 can displace relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, and the second matching protrusion 122 is configured to push the steering protrusion 1211 to drive the driving component 121 to displace in a direction intersecting the first direction. The driving member 121 is configured to drive the detected member 500 to slide relative to the box 100 . At least one of the steering protrusion 1211 and the second matching protrusion 122 has a third transmission surface 1221 that is inclined relative to the first direction.

Schematically, there is an included angle between the sliding direction of the detected component 500 and the first direction, that is, the detecting component 500 can be displaced relative to the box body 100 in a direction intersecting the first direction. Exemplarily, the driving member 121 is slidably installed on the detected member 500 along the first direction.

The second end 120 of the box body 100 is integrally formed with a guide portion 128 . The guide portion 128 protrudes from the second end 120 of the box body 100 along the first direction and away from the box body 100 . The guide portion 128 A second guide groove 1281 is formed on the upper surface. In this embodiment, the second guide groove 1281 is a dovetail groove. The extension direction of the second guide groove 1281 is the fourth direction. The fourth direction is not orthogonal to the second direction and the third direction and is located in the plane formed by the second direction and the third direction. The fourth direction is not orthogonal to the second direction and the third direction. The first direction is orthogonal. In this embodiment, the angle between the fourth direction and the second direction is 38°, and the angle between the fourth direction and the third direction is 51°. The component to be detected 500 is slidably installed on the second guide groove 1281. Specifically, the component to be detected 500 is integrally formed with a guide protrusion 5001 that cooperates with the second guide groove 1281. The guide protrusion 5001 cooperates with the second guide groove 1281 to allow the detected component to be detected. Piece 500 is movable in a fourth direction. The detected protrusion 508 is integrally formed on the detected part 500 . The detected protrusion 508 protrudes from the detected part 500 along the first direction away from the box body 100 . The detected protrusion 508 It is used to contact the detection component in the image forming device and move the detection component so that an electrical signal is generated in the image forming device to detect the developing device. The second end 120 of the box body 100 is also integrally formed with a first positioning post 127 extending in a first direction away from the box body 100. A fourth elastic member 760 is fixedly connected to the first positioning post 127. In this embodiment In this example, the fourth elastic member 760 is a tension spring. One end of the fourth elastic member 760 is fixedly connected to the first positioning post 127 and the other end is fixedly connected to the detected component 500 .

The detected piece 500 is integrally formed with a third chute 509 extending along the first direction, and the driving member 121 is slidably installed in the third chute 509 . The driving member 121 includes a cylinder, a sliding part 1212 and two turning protrusions 1211. The sliding part 1212 and the two turning protrusions 1211 are both disposed on the circumferential surface of the cylinder. The sliding part 1212 is slidingly connected to the third slide groove 509, one of which is The turning protrusion 1211 is farther from the second end 120 of the box body 100 in the first direction than the other turning protrusion 1211 .

The end of the translation member 420 away from the first end 110 is the force-applying end. The second end 120 of the box body 100 is provided with a second support hole. The second support hole is aligned with the second slide groove 158 in the first direction. The translation member 420 The force-applying end of 420 is movably supported by the second support hole and can extend out of the second chute 158 through the second support hole. In the first direction, the driving member 121 is aligned with the force-applying end of the translation member 420 .

An interference portion 126 is integrally formed on the second end 120 of the box body 100. The interference portion 126 protrudes from the second end 120 of the box body 100 along the first direction and away from the box body 100. The second matching protrusion 122 can be provided on the interference portion 126 through an integral molding process. The number of the second matching protrusions 122 can be two. The two second matching protrusions 122 are located on the movement trajectories of the two steering protrusions 1211 in one-to-one correspondence. For example, each steering protrusion 1211 and each second matching protrusion 122 are provided with a third transmission surface 1221. In other embodiments, the third transmission surface 1221 may be provided only on the steering protrusion 1211 , or the third transmission surface 1221 may be provided only on the second matching protrusion 122 .

In this structure, when the translation member 420 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, the translation member 420 drives the driving member 121 to be synchronously displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, and interacts with the second matching protrusion through the steering protrusion 1211 The cooperation between 122 drives the detected component 500 to be displaced relative to the box 100 in a direction intersecting the first direction.

When the translation member 420 moves in the first direction from the first end 110 to the second end 120 , the driving member 121 moves together with the translation member 420 , and one of the turning protrusions 1211 first contacts the corresponding second one on the interference portion 126 . The matching protrusions 122 interfere, and under the action of the third transmission surface 1221, the detected part 500 is driven to move along the fourth direction, that is, the detected part 500 moves from the non-detecting position to the detecting position, and the detected part on the detected part 500 sudden Step 508 moves the detection part in the image forming device, causing the first electrical signal to be generated in the image forming device. As the driving member 121 continues to move, the above-mentioned second matching protrusion 122 and the steering protrusion 1211 are separated from each other. Under the elastic force of the fourth elastic member 760, the detected part 500 is reset along the fourth direction, that is, the detected part 500 When moving from the detection position to the non-detection position, the image forming device stops generating electrical signals. As the driving member 121 continues to move, another steering protrusion 1211 interferes with another second matching protrusion 122, and under the action of the third transmission surface 1221, the detected component 500 is driven to move from the non-detection position to the detection position again. A second electrical signal is generated within the image forming device. As the driving member 121 continues to move, the other steering protrusion 1211 and the other second matching protrusion 122 are separated from each other. Under the elastic force of the fourth elastic member 760, the detected piece 500 moves from the detection position to the non-detection position. Image The forming device stops generating electrical signals, thereby completing the detection process, and at this time, the translational member 420 moves to a maximum value. The image forming device determines the information of the developing device (such as newness, model, capacity, lifespan, etc.) based on the number, intervals, and duration of electrical signal generation. The distance between the detected protrusion 508 and the developing roller 210 when the detected part 500 is in the non-detection position is smaller than the distance between the detected protrusion 508 and the developing roller 210 when the detected part 500 is in the detection position.

In other embodiments, more steering protrusions 1211 can be provided on the driving member 121 to set different times of generating electrical signals, and the spacing between the steering protrusions 1211 can also be adjusted to set the interval time between electrical signals. The moving speed of the translation member 420 or the length of the second matching protrusion 122 is used to adjust the duration of the electrical signal.

In a possible implementation, as shown in FIGS. 153 to 156 , the number of the turning protrusion 1211 is one, the number of the second matching protrusions 122 is multiple, and the plurality of second matching protrusions 122 are arranged at intervals along the first direction. , the plurality of second matching protrusions 122 are located on the movement trajectory of the steering protrusion 1211.

For example, the number of the second fitting protrusions 122 may be two, and one of the second fitting protrusions 122 is closer to the box body 100 than the other second fitting protrusion 122 in the first direction. The driving member 121 is also provided with a first force-receiving portion 1213 aligned with the translation member 420 in the first direction, and the second guide groove 1281 extends along a direction parallel to the second direction. The detected piece 500 is slidably installed on the second guide groove 1281 through the guide protrusion 5001 and can move along the second direction.

This structure can simplify the structure of the driving member 121, facilitate the production and manufacturing of the developing device, help reduce the space occupied by the transmission structure at the second end 120 of the box body 100, and facilitate the miniaturization of the developing device.

Optionally, the developing device further includes a power supply component. The power supply component includes a conductive protrusion 5002 disposed on the component to be detected 500. The conductive protrusion 5002 protrudes from the component to be detected 500 along the first direction in a direction away from the box body 100. The conductive protrusion 5002 is further away from the developing roller 210 than the detected protrusion 508 in the second direction. The power supply assembly also includes a conductive member 910 disposed at the second end 120 of the box body 100. The conductive member 910 is electrically connected to the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260. The conductive member 910 is provided with a first electrical contact portion 911. In this embodiment, The middle conductive part 910 is a metal sheet, the first electrical contact part 911 is a bent contact pin integrally formed with the conductive part 910, and the first electrical contact part 911 is elastic, and the first electrical contact part 911 abuts on the ground. Elastic deformation occurs on the detection part 500 to ensure that the detection part 500 is always in close contact during its movement. In this embodiment, the detection part 500 is made of conductive material, such as conductive resin.

When the translation member 420 moves from the first end 110 to the second end 120 along the first direction, the translation member 420 pushes the first force-receiving portion 1213 on the driving member 121 to the left along the first direction, so that the driving member 121 Move leftward along the first direction, so that the steering protrusion 1211 passes the second matching protrusion 122 that is closer to the box body 100 and interferes with the second matching protrusion 122, so that the driving member 121 drives the detected component 500 along the The second guide groove 1281 moves in the second direction from the non-detection position to the detection position, thereby causing the image forming device to generate an electrical signal. Then, as the driving member 121 continues to move, the steering protrusion 1211 no longer interferes with the second matching protrusion 122 that is closer to the box body 100. At this time, under the elastic force of the fourth elastic member 760, the detected piece 500 moves from the detection position. Move to non-detection position and reset. As the driving member 121 continues to move, the steering protrusion 1211 interferes with the second matching protrusion 122 farther away from the box body 100, so that the driving member 121 drives the detected member 500 to move from the non-detection position to the detection position for the second time. The image forming device is caused to generate an electrical signal for the second time. Then, as the driving member 121 continues to move, the steering protrusion 1211 no longer interferes with the second matching protrusion 122 further away from the box body 100. At this time, under the elastic force of the fourth elastic member 760, the detected piece 500 moves from the detection position. Move to non-detection position and reset. Thus, the image forming device detects the developing device. At this time, the translation member 420 moves to a maximum value, and the driving member 121 loses power and cannot continue to move.

When the translation member 420 moves from the first end 110 to the second end 120 in the first direction, the conductive protrusion 5002 remains in contact with the power supply terminal in the image forming device, and transmits the voltage to the conductive member 910 through the detected member 500. It is transmitted to the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260, so that the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 are charged and can absorb the developer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second end 120 of the box body 100 can also be provided with a second protective cover 620. The second protective cover 620 covers at least part of the detected component 500, the driving component 121, the fourth elastic component 760, the conductive component 910 and the like. To protect the above components, the second protective cover 620 is provided with an opening for the detected protrusion 508 and the conductive protrusion 5002 to extend out of the second protective cover 620 .

Example 12

As shown in FIGS. 103 to 111 , in one possible implementation, the transmission unit further includes a transmission member based on Embodiment 10, and the first rotating member 410 is rotatably disposed at the first end 110 of the box 100 , the first rotating member 410 is transmission connected with the transmission assembly, and the first rotating member 410 is used to drive the transmission member to move relative to the box body 100 .

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107 , schematically, the first rotating member 410 includes a gear portion 4104 , and the gear portion 4104 faces the first end 110 of the box 100 in the first direction. The gear part 4104 is a gear with missing teeth (ie, an incomplete gear) including a meshing section 4101 and a notch section 4102. The meshing section 4101 and the notch section 4102 are provided on the outer circumferential surface of the gear part 4104. The meshing section 4101 of the gear part 4104 can mesh with the stirring gear 310, and the notch section 4102 of the gear part 4104 can disengage the meshing section 4101 from the stirring gear 310 so that the first rotating member 410 does not rotate with the stirring gear 310. The gear portion 4104 is provided with a contact surface 4106, and the contact surface 4106 is located on a side of the gear portion 4104 facing the first end 110.

Among them, the length of the teeth of the stirring gear 310 (i.e., the tooth width) in the first direction is greater than the length of the teeth of the meshing section 4101 (i.e., the tooth width) in the first direction. Therefore, the first rotating member 410 can be used for mixing with the stirring gear 310 . The gear 310 meshes and rotates with the stirring gear 310, and can move left and right on the teeth of the stirring gear 310 in the first direction without being disengaged from the stirring gear 310. It can be understood that the first contact protrusion 412 can be provided on the first rotating member 410 through a one-time molding process, or can also be provided on the first rotating member 410 through bonding or tightening with fasteners.

As shown in FIG. 109 , for example, the contact member 612 is formed into a cylindrical structure. Specifically, when viewed from right to left in the first direction, the contact member 612 is in the shape of a circular ring. The first contact protrusion 412 rotates synchronously with the first rotating member 410. When the contact member 612 pushes the first contact protrusion 412, the first rotating member 410 can be driven to displace relative to the box 100 in the first direction.

With this structure, when the transmission assembly receives the power output from the image forming device and moves, the transmission assembly can drive the first rotating member 410 to rotate. When the transmission assembly drives the first rotating member 410 to rotate relative to the box body 100, through the first contact The cooperation between the protrusion 412 and the contact member 612 drives the first rotating member 410 to be displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction and drives the transmission member to move relative to the box body 100. When the transmission member moves, it can drive the detected component 500 to move relative to the box. The body 100 moves between the detection position and the non-detection position, thereby allowing the image forming device to obtain information about the developing device.

Illustratively, the first driving surface I1 is provided on the contact member 612 . When the first rotating member 410 rotates relative to the box body 100, the first driving surface I1 on the abutting member 612 can move toward the first abutting protrusion of the first rotating member 410. The actuator 412 exerts a component force along the first direction, and the component force drives the first rotating member 410 to displace relative to the box body 100 in the first direction.

In this embodiment, the contact member 612 is provided with a first protrusion 6123, the first protrusion 6123 is configured to abut the first contact protrusion 412, and the first driving surface I1 is provided on the first protrusion 6123.

Among them, the first protruding portion 6123 is located at one end of the abutting member 612 facing the first end 110, and a first tip T1 is formed on the first protruding portion 6123. Those skilled in the art can set the height of the first protruding portion 6123 as needed (i.e. The size in the first direction) is not uniquely limited here. Figure 109 shows that the abutting member 612 also has a recess and a first flat portion 6127 extending in the circumferential direction. The first flat portion 6127 has a first end H1 and a second end H2 in the circumferential direction. The first flat portion 6127 is formed into an arc-shaped structure and the end surface of the first flat portion 6127 is an arc-shaped plane. Specifically, each point on the end surface of the first flat portion 6127 close to the first end 110 in the first direction extends from the first direction to the first end 110 in the first direction. The distance at one end 110 is the same. In other embodiments, the distance from each point on the end surface of the first flat portion 6127 close to the first end 110 in the first direction to the first end 110 in the first direction may also be different. The first flat portion 6127 is closer to the first end 110 than the recess in the first direction, and the first flat portion 6127 is farther from the first end 110 than the first tip T1 in the first direction. In other embodiments, The distance between the first flat portion 6127 and the first end 110 in the first direction may be the same as the distance between the tip and the first end 110 . In this embodiment, the number of the first protrusions 6123 is non-limiting, and those skilled in the art can set it according to actual needs.

In this embodiment, the first driving surface I1 is located on the first protrusion 6123, and the extending direction of the first driving surface I1 is a direction that crosses the first direction and gradually approaches the first end 110 along the Z direction. Specifically, The upstream end of a driving surface I1 in the Z direction is farther from the first end 110 in the first direction than the downstream end. The Z direction is the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410 .

When the first rotating member 410 drives the first contact protrusion 412 to rotate to pass the first protrusion 6123, under the action of the first driving surface I1, the first protrusion 6123 pushes the first contact protrusion 412 and thereby drives the first protrusion 412. The rotating member 410 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, thereby causing the detected component 500 to move.

In a possible implementation, the contact member 612 is also provided with a second driving surface I2 that intersects with the first direction, and the first driving surface I1 and the second driving surface I2 are in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410 Have intervals.

In this embodiment, the contact member 612 is also provided with a second protrusion 6124. The second protrusion 6124 is configured to abut the first contact protrusion 412. The second driving surface I2 is provided on the second protrusion 6124. The second driving surface I2 is inclined relative to the first direction.

The second protruding portion 6124 is also located at one end of the contact member 612 facing the first end 110 , and a second tip T2 is formed on the second protruding portion 6124 . In the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410, the second protruding part 6124 is located upstream of the first protruding part 6123, and a recess is provided between the first protruding part 6123 and the second protruding part 6124. The definition of the extending direction of the second driving surface I2 is the same as the definition of the extending direction of the first driving surface I1. It can be understood that the concave position between the first protruding part 6123 and the second protruding part 6124 is equivalent to the concave position B in Embodiment 3.

In this structure, when the first contact protrusion 412 passes through the second driving surface, the gap between the second driving surface and the first driving surface, and the first driving surface in sequence, the first rotating member 410 is opposite to the box body in the first direction. Reciprocating displacement is generated, thereby causing the detected object 500 to move between the detection position and the non-detection position multiple times. Therefore, the image forming device can generate electrical signals multiple times, and the image forming device can obtain more information about the developing device.

As shown in Figure 109, the contact member 612 also includes a third protruding portion 6125. The third protruding portion 6125 is provided with a third tip T3 and a third driving surface I3. The extension direction of the third driving surface I3 is defined in accordance with the first driving surface. The extension direction of surface I1 has the same definition. In the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410, the third protruding portion 6125 is located upstream of the second protruding portion 6124. A first recess B1 is provided between the third protruding part 6125 and the first flat part 6127. A second recess B2 is provided between the second protruding part 6124 and the third protruding part 6125. The first protruding part 6123 and the second A first recess B1 is provided between the protrusions 6124 . The first concave position B1, the second concave position B2 and the third concave position B3 are at the same distance from the first end 110 in the first direction, and the third tip T3, the second tip T2 and the first tip T1 are at the same distance in the first direction. The distance from the first end 110 is the same. Among them, the first concave position B1, the second concave position B2 and the third concave position B3 are all equivalent to the concave position B in Embodiment 3. In other embodiments, the distance between the first tip T1 and the first end 110 in the first direction may be different from the distance between the third tip T3 and the second tip T2 and the first end 110 in the first direction. The lengths of the recessed portion and the protruding portion around the circumferential direction of the abutting member 612 may be consistent or inconsistent. This embodiment does not limit the recesses and protrusions, and the number, length, and shape of the recesses and protrusions on the abutment piece 612 can be set according to actual needs.

In addition, there is a fixing position H3 on the contact member 612, and the fixing position H3 is in the shape of a groove. In the first direction, the distance from the fixed position H3 to the first end 110 and the distance from the first flat portion 6127 to the first end 110 may be the same or different, and those skilled in the art can set them as needed.

In a possible implementation, the angle between the first driving surface I1 and the first direction is different from the angle between the second driving surface I2 and the first direction.

For example, the angle between the first driving surface I1 and the first direction is smaller than the angle between the second driving surface I2 and the first direction, and the angle between the third driving surface I3 and the second driving surface I2 and the first direction is the same. . Those skilled in the art can set the specific size of the angle between each driving surface and the first direction as needed, which is not uniquely limited here.

With this structure, when the first contact protrusion 412 passes through the first protrusion 6123 and the second protrusion 6124, the first rotating member 410 moves at different speeds relative to the box 100 in the first direction, and the detected member 500 is never non-stop. The speed at which the detection position moves to the detection position is different, and the speed at which the electrical signal is generated is different. The image forming device can detect more information about the developing device by generating electrical signals with different speeds.

In a possible implementation, the developing device 1 further includes a first elastic member 710 , one end of the first elastic member 710 offsets the first rotating member 410 , and the first elastic member 710 is used to The first rotating member 410 is driven to abut against the contact member 612 .

The first elastic member 710 may be a spring. One end of the first elastic member 710 away from the first end 110 abuts the first rotating member 410. The elastic force of the first elastic member 710 drives the first contact protrusion 412 to reliably contact the contact member 612. offset.

In this structure, the elastic force of the first elastic member 710 is used to reliably abut the first rotating member 410 and the abutting member 612. Specifically, the first elastic member 710 causes the first abutting protrusion 412 on the first rotating member 410 to abut against the abutting member 612. Part 612 is reliable. When the transmission assembly drives the first rotating member 410 to rotate, the first rotating member 410 can reciprocate along the first direction relative to the box 100 under the action of the first elastic member 710 and the contact member 612 .

The developing device further includes a first support column 720 disposed at the first end 110 , and the first rotating member 410 is rotatably mounted on the first support column 720 . In this embodiment, the first support column 720 is formed by the first protective cover 610 extending from its inner wall in the first direction close to the first end 110 . The first support column 720 can be inserted into the first rotary member 410 . A mounting hole 4105, that is, the first support column 720 can be used to support the first rotating member 410. The abutting member 612 is arranged around the first support column 720 . The first rotating member 410 is supported by the first supporting column 720 so that the first rotating member 410 can rotate relative to the box body 100 .

Illustratively, the first rotating member 410 includes a plurality of coaxial and spaced apart cylinders. The first support column 720 passes through the innermost cylinder, and one end of the first elastic member 710 extends between two adjacent cylinders.

As shown in Figure 106, the number of cylinders may be two, and the two cylinders include a first cylinder 4131 located on the outside and a second cylinder 4132 located on the inside. In the first direction, the gear part 4104 is closer to the first end 110 of the box 100 than the first cylinder 4131, and the tooth tip circle radius of the gear part 4104 is greater than the outer circumferential surface radius of the first cylinder 4131. The first cylinder 4131 and the gear part 4104 may be integrally formed and the rotation axes coincide with each other.

The second cylinder 4132 may be coaxial and integrally formed with the first cylinder 4131 along the first direction. The diameter of the second cylinder 4132 is smaller than the diameter of the first cylinder 4131. The inner wall of the second cylinder 4132 defines a first mounting hole 4105. The first mounting hole 4105 is also surrounded by the first cylinder 4131. The outer circumferential surface of the second cylinder 4132 is radially separated from the inner circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131, that is, there is a gap in the radial direction between the second cylinder 4132 and the first cylinder 4131. One end of the gap away from the box 100 in the first direction is closed by a wall connecting the second cylinder 4132 and the first cylinder 4131 . The first contact protrusion 412 is protruding from the outer circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131 and extends in a direction away from the outer circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131 . In this embodiment, the first contact protrusion 412 is a cylinder extending from the outer circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131 . The first contact protrusion 412 is spaced apart from the gear portion 4104 in the first direction. The first elastic member 710 is located in the gap between the first cylinder 4131 and the second cylinder 4132 and surrounds the surface of the second cylinder 4132. The first elastic member 710 can be compressed or stretched in the first direction. An elastic member 710 has two ends in the first direction, and one end away from the first end 110 of the box body 100 is in contact with the wall closing the end of the gap.

Exemplarily, the first end 110 of the box body 100 is also provided with a first screw 113. The nut of the first screw 113 is larger than the first mounting hole 4105 of the second cylinder 4132. The first elastic member 710 is close to the first end of the box body 100. One end of the first end 110 is in contact with the nut of the first screw 113 . Specifically, the first support column 720 has an internal threaded hole 721 along the first direction, and the first screw 113 is threadedly connected to the internal threaded hole 721 . The first screw 113 can also be inserted into the first mounting hole 4105, that is, the first support column 720 and the first screw 113 can be combined in the first mounting hole 4105. Since the nut of the first screw 113 is larger than the first mounting hole 4105 of the second barrel 4132, when the first rotating member 410 is supported by the first support column 720 and the first screw 113 is threadedly connected to the threaded hole, the A rotating member 410 cannot be separated from the first support column 720 but can move relative to the first support column 720 . When the first rotating member 410 receives an external force from right to left in the first direction, the first rotating member 410 will move to the left relative to the first support column 720 . However, due to the contact between one end of the first elastic member 710 and the first screw 113 The nut abuts, and one end is fixedly connected to the first rotating member 410. Therefore, when the first rotating member 410 moves to the left under the action of force, the first elastic member 710 is compressed, and at the same time, it also releases an elastic member from the first rotating member 410 according to its own elasticity. The elastic force from left to right, when the force received by the first rotating member 410 disappears, the first rotating member 410 will move to the right relative to the first support column 720 according to the elastic force released by the first elastic member 710 . The force received by the first rotating component 410 in the first direction may be a component force that is decomposed into the first direction or may be a force parallel to the first direction.

In this structure, after one end of the first elastic member 710 extends between two adjacent cylinders, the first rotating member 410 can limit the position of the first elastic member 710 to ensure that the first contact protrusion 412 and the contact can be reliably driven. The connectors 612 are offset.

When the contact member 612 is installed on the first protective cover 610, the first rotating member 410 and the first screw 113 are installed on the first support column 720, the projection of the contact member 612 in the first direction is in line with the first contact protrusion. The projections of the motion trajectories of 412 in the first direction at least partially overlap, and the first elastic member 710 is always in a compressed state, that is, the first elastic member 710 will always release the elastic force that causes the first rotating member 410 to move to the right, causing the first rotation The first contact protrusion 412 on the member 410 always maintains a state of contact with the contact member 612. In the first direction, the contact member 612 is located between the first protective cover 610 and the first rotating member 410 . The contact member 612 can contact the first contact protrusion 412 on the first rotating member 410 . The member 612 exerts abutting force on the first rotating member 410 to limit its rightward movement and even allows it to move to the left.

Since the first rotating member 410 can mesh with the stirring gear 310 and rotate with it, and can also move left and right along the first direction relative to the stirring gear 310, the first rotating member 410 can sequentially interact with the first flat portion on the abutting member 612. 6127. The concave position and the protruding part are in contact. When the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the first flat portion 6127 of the contact member 612, the first rotating member 410 and the stirring gear 310 have a first meshing position in the first direction; the first contact protrusion 412 contacts When in each concave position of the contact member 612, the first rotating member 410 and the stirring gear 310 have a second meshing position in the first direction; the first contact protrusion 412 is in contact with each protrusion of the contact member 612. When , the first rotating member 410 and the stirring gear 310 have a third meshing position in the first direction. It can be seen that in the first direction, when the first rotating member 410 is in the first meshing position, it is closer to the first end 110 of the box 100 than when it is in the second meshing position, and when it is in the third meshing position, it is closer than when it is in the first meshing position. Close to the first end 110 of the box body 100 .

The first contact protrusion 412 rotates with the first rotating member 410. When the first contact protrusion 412 rotates from contacting the first flat portion 6127 to the contact recessed position, the first rotating member 410 is elastically forced by the first elastic member 710. It affects the stirring gear 310 to move rightward from the first meshing position to the second meshing position in the first direction; when the first contact protrusion 412 rotates from the contact recess to the contact protrusion, the first rotating member 410 is resisted The influence of the relay force moves the stirring gear 310 to the left from the second meshing position to the third meshing position in the first direction; when the first abutment protrusion 412 rotates from the abutment protrusion to the abutment recess, the first rotating member 410 Under the influence of the elastic force of the first elastic member 710, the stirring gear 310 moves rightward from the third meshing position to the second meshing position along the first direction. Due to the contact between the first contact protrusion 412 and the contact member 612, the contact member 612 can also limit the first rotating member 410 in the first direction, preventing the first rotating member from being moved when the stirring gear 310 is engaged. 410 breaks away from the stirring gear 310 under the elastic force of the first elastic member 710 .

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108 , in one possible implementation, the first rotating member 410 is provided with an identification portion 416 , and the first protective cover 610 is provided with a hole 613 exposing the identification portion 416 .

The identification portion 416 is located at the end surface of the first rotating member 410 away from the first end 110 in the first direction. The identification portion 416 may be a groove or pattern on the first rotating member 410, and is not unique here. limited. For example, the hole 613 can be formed on the first protective cover 610 through an integrated molding process. This embodiment does not limit the specific position, shape and size of the hole 613, and those skilled in the art can set it according to actual needs.

With this structure, when the identification portion 416 is observed through the hole 613, it can be determined whether the first rotating member 410 is rotating, and further, whether the developing device is operating normally can be determined.

As shown in Figures 105 and 108, the first protective cover 610 is also provided with a second opening 614, which is used to expose the power receiving portion 321 of the power receiving device 320, so that the power receiving portion 321 can receive the power from the image forming device. The power transmitted by the device.

As shown in FIG. 103 , FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 , the transmission member includes a translation member 420 extending along the first direction, and one end of the translation member 420 offsets the first rotating member 410 .

Wherein, the translation member 420 forms a rod-shaped member extending along the first direction. The axial direction of the rod-shaped member is parallel to the first direction and extends from the first end 110 to the second end 120 of the box body 100. When the first rotation When the member 410 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, it can drive the translation member 420 to be displaced relative to the box body 100 synchronously.

With this structure, when the first rotating member 410 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, the detected member 500 is driven by the translation member 420 to move between the detection position and the non-detection position, so that the image forming device can obtain information about the developing device. .

In one possible implementation, a limiting structure is provided on the box body 100, and the transmission member is limited to the limiting structure.

The box body 100 includes an upper cover 170 . The fifth end 150 of the box body 100 is formed on the upper cover 170 . The upper cover 170 can prevent the developer in the box body 100 from leaking. The limiting structure includes a first slide groove 172, a first limiting part 173 and a movable groove 174 provided on the upper cover 170. The first chute 172 extends along the first direction, and in the second direction, the first chute 172 is closer to the fourth end 140 than the third end 130 . In this embodiment, there are two first limiting parts 173, which are respectively located at both ends of the first slide groove 172 in the first direction. The first limiting part 173 has a limiting through hole penetrating in the first direction (Fig. not shown in ). In this embodiment, there are two movable grooves 174 . The two movable grooves 174 are respectively located at both ends of the first slide groove 172 in the first direction. The movable grooves 174 are closer to the first limiting part 173 in the first direction. The third end 130 or the fourth end 140 of the box body 100, that is, the first limiting portion 173, is located between the first slide groove 172 and the movable groove 174 in the first direction. This embodiment does not limit the number and shape of the first limiting parts 173 and the movable grooves 174, and can be changed according to actual needs.

As shown in Figures 103 and 111, the translation member 420 is a rod-shaped structure. The translation member 420 is located at the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 and is detachably installed on the upper cover 170. The translation member 420 can be on the first Movement left and right in the direction. The translation member 420 includes an integrally formed first rod portion 428 and a first driven portion 421 . The first rod part 428 is partially installed on the first chute 172, and the translation member 420 is limited by the first limiting part 173 to prevent the translation member 420 from falling off the first chute 172 and at the same time, the first rod part 428 can pass through. The limiting through hole on the first limiting portion 173 moves left and right in the first direction, that is, the first rod portion 428 is partially located in the first slide groove 172 and is partially located in the movable grooves 174 at both left and right ends through the limiting through hole. In this embodiment, the first driven part 421 is a block. The first driven part 421 is located at the first end 110 of the box 100 and is connected to an end of the first rod part 428 close to the first end 110. The first driven part 421 is a block-shaped object. The first driven part 421 can move in the movable groove 174 located at the right end of the first chute 172. The first driven part 421 has one end that abuts the abutment surface 4106 of the first rotating member 410, and this end is always located outside the movable groove 174. .

This structure limits the transmission member through the limiting structure, improves the stability of the transmission member, and ensures that the first rotating member 410 can reliably drive the detected component 500 through the transmission member when it is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction. Movement between detection position and non-detection position.

A third elastic member 750 is set on the translation member 420 , and the third elastic member 750 is located in the right movable groove 174 near the first end 110 . One end of the third elastic member 750 is in contact with the wall formed by the first limiting part 173 and the movable groove 174 , and the other end is in contact with the first driven part 421 . That is, the third elastic member 750 is located between the first limiting part 173 and the movable groove 174 . between the first driven parts 421 . When the first driven part 421 receives the contact force of the first rotating member 410 in the first direction, the translation member 420 moves to the left, and the third elastic member 750 is compressed. When the upward contact force weakens or disappears, the translation member 420 moves to the right according to the elastic force of the third elastic member 750 itself.

The following is the working process of the developing device disclosed in this embodiment. The first rotating member 410 abuts the translational member 420 to cause the translational member 420 to move left in the first direction, and the third elastic member 750 releases the elastic force to cause the translational member 420 to move rightward in the first direction. When 420 moves, it drives the detected piece 500 to move between the detection position and the non-detection position.

The developing device is installed into the image forming device. When the developing device does not start working, that is, when the power receiving portion 321 of the power receiving device 320 does not receive the power output by the image forming device, the first rotating member 410 is in the initial position and the meshing section 4101 and The stirring gear 310 is meshed, and the first rotating member 410 is in contact with the contact member 612 and the first driven portion 421 of the translation member 420, in which the first contact protrusion 412 is at the first end of the first flat portion 6127 H1 is contacted, the first rotating member 410 is in the first meshing position, the first elastic member 710 and the third elastic member 750 are in a compressed state, and the detected member 500 is in the detection position.

When the power receiving part 321 receives the power output from the image forming device and starts to rotate and drives the entire transmission assembly to rotate, the first rotating member 410 starts to rotate following the stirring gear 310 , and the first contact protrusion 412 is contacted at the first end H1 During the process of rotating until the second end H2 is contacted, that is, when the first contact protrusion 412 is contacted by the first flat portion 6127, the first rotating member 410 is always at the first meshing position in the first direction and moves in translation. The component 420 does not move, and the detected component 500 is in the detection position. When the first contact protrusion 412 rotates from the second end H2 to the first concave position B1, the first contact protrusion 412 loses the contact force, and the first rotating member 410 is affected by the elastic force of the first elastic member 710 and rotates along the The stirring gear 310 moves to the right from the first meshing position in the first direction. The translation member 420 is affected by the third elastic member 750 and moves to the right in the first direction. The translation member 420 causes the detected component 500 to move to the non-stop position. Detect location. The first contact protrusion 412 is located at the first concave position B1 and stops moving to the right when it receives the contact force again. The first rotating member 410 is located at the second meshing position. When the first contact protrusion 412 rotates on the first concave position B1, the first contact protrusion 412 is rotated at the first concave position B1. The rotating component 410 and the translating component 420 do not move in the first direction, and the detected component 500 remains in the non-detecting position.

When the first contact protrusion 412 rotates from the first concave position B1 to the third tip T3 of the third protrusion 6125, the first contact protrusion 412 is contacted by the third driving surface I3, and the first contact protrusion 412 412 approaches the third protrusion 6125 along the third driving surface I3, and at the same time, the first rotating member 410 moves to the left from the second meshing position on the stirring gear 310 along the first direction and drives the translational member 420 to move to the left. 420 causes the detected part 500 to move from the non-detection position to the detection position. When the first contact protrusion 412 is located at the third tip T3, the first rotating member 410 and the translating member 420 stop moving left, the first rotating member 410 is located at the third meshing position in the first direction, and the detected member 500 moves to the detection position again. Location. It is known that, during the rotation of the first contact protrusion 412 from the first concave position B1 to the third protruding portion 6125, the detected piece 500 can move to the detection position again.

The process of the first contact protrusion 412 rotating from the third protrusion 6125 to the second recess B2 and the process of the first contact protrusion 412 rotating from the second tip T2 of the second protrusion 6124 to the third recess B3 are the same as the process of the first contact protrusion 412 rotating from the third protrusion 6125 to the second recess B2. A contact protrusion 412 rotates from the second end H2 to the first concave position B1 in the same process, so that the first rotating member 410 moves to the right in the first direction and is located in the second meshing position, causing the detected member 500 to move to the non-stop position. Detect location.

The process of the first contact protrusion 412 rotating from the second concave position B2 to the second tip T2, the process of the first contact protrusion 412 rotating from the third concave position B3 to the first tip T1 of the first protrusion 6123 are the same as the first process of the first contact protrusion 412 rotating from the second concave position B2 to the second tip T2. The process of rotation of the contact protrusion 412 from the first concave position B1 to the third tip T3 is consistent, so that the first rotating member 410 moves left in the first direction and is located in the third meshing position, so that the detected piece 500 moves to the detection position. The first contact protrusion 412 rotates from the second concave position B2 to the second tip T2 for the third contact, and the first contact protrusion 412 rotates from the third concave position B3 to The first tip T1 is the fourth contact. The difference is that since the angle between the first driving surface I1 and the first direction is smaller than the angle between the third driving surface I3 and the second driving surface I2 and the first direction, the first contact protrusion 412 is protected by the third driving surface I1 and the first direction. The contact time of a driving surface I1 is shorter, so that the first contact protrusion 412 is located at the first tip T1 faster and the first rotating member 410 moves leftward from the second meshing position to the third meshing position faster, thereby causing the driven member to move to the third meshing position. The detection piece 500 moves to the detection position faster.

In this embodiment, when the first contact protrusion 412 moves to contact the first tip T1, the second tip T2, and the third tip T3, the object to be detected 500 is located at the detection position. In other embodiments, it can also be configured such that when the first contact protrusion 412 moves to any point on the third driving surface I3, the second driving surface I2, and the first driving surface I1, the detected component 500 is located at the detection position. .

When the first contact protrusion 412 rotates to the fixed position H3, the notch section 4102 of the first rotating member 410 faces the stirring gear 310 and is disengaged. That is, the first rotating member 410 no longer rotates, and the detected component 500 remains at the detection position. , thus completing the detection and the developing device can work normally. The fixed position H3 can limit the position of the first contact protrusion 412 to prevent the first rotating member 410 from rotating and causing the detected member 500 to move. In order to meet the detection requirements of the image forming device, the length, number and shape of the first flat portion 6127 on the contact member 612 can be set according to the specific requirements of the image forming device.

When the developing device is taken out of the image forming device, the identification portion 416 on the first rotary member 410 is exposed through the hole 613 on the first protective cover 610 to indicate that the developing device is in a state of completion of inspection. The detected component 500 can be moved along the R direction to drive the translation component 420 to move to the left, so that the first rotating component 410 loses elasticity in the first direction, and then the first rotating component 410 can be rotated to reset it, so that the developing device is in the Undetected status.

Through the above process, the image forming device can detect the information of the developing device (such as different models, different capacities, newness, etc.) by detecting changes in the movement speed of the object 500 to be detected, the number of touches, the length of intervals, etc. ), and facilitates the reset of the detected part 500.

Example 13

The main difference between this embodiment and Embodiment 12 is that the first support column 720 and the upper cover 170 are integrated, and the structure of the first rotating member 410 is changed.

As shown in Figure 112, the first support column 720 is provided on the side wall of the upper cover 170 at the first end 110 of the box body 100, and is closer to the fourth end 140 in the second direction relative to the third end 130. The first support The pillar 720 extends rightward from the side wall of the upper cover 170 in the first direction. The circumferential surface of the first support column 720 is provided with a radially integrally formed The reinforcing ribs are integrally connected to the first end 110 of the box body 100 . The first elastic member 710 surrounds the first support column 720, and one end of the first elastic member 710 is in contact with the reinforcing rib.

As shown in FIGS. 113 and 114 , in this embodiment, the first rotating member 410 has a gear portion 4104 , a first contact protrusion 412 and an identification portion 416 . The gear part 4104 has a meshing section 4101 and a notch section 4102, and the meshing section 4101 and the notch section 4102 are jointly arranged around the circumference of the gear part 4104. That is to say, the gear part 4104 is an incomplete gear. The meshing section 4101 has teeth arranged around the addendum circle. The meshing section 4101 can mesh with the stirring gear 310 and be driven by the stirring gear 310 to rotate the first rotating member 410. When the gap section 4102 is opposite to the stirring gear 310, the first rotating member 410 is out of mesh with the stirring gear 310 and no longer rotates. The gear portion 4104 is provided with a first mounting hole 4105, and the first mounting hole 4105 is sleeved on the first support column 720 so that the first rotating member 410 is supported by the upper cover 170. The first rotating member 410 can be mounted on the first supporting column. 720 moves left and right along the first direction. The first contact protrusion 412 and the identification portion 416 are provided on the first surface 4107 of the gear portion 4104. The first contact protrusion 412 is a protrusion formed in a first direction extending from the first surface 4107 in a direction away from the side wall. The first contact protrusion 412 is used to contact the contact member 612 . The first rotating member 410 also has a second surface (not shown in the figure). The second surface is the other surface of the first rotating member 410 opposite to the first surface 4107 in the first direction. The second surface is opposite to the first surface 4107 in the first direction. It is closer to the first end 110 of the box 100 than the first surface 4107 . In the first direction, the first elastic member 710 is located between the side wall of the upper cover 170 at the first end 110 and the first rotating member 410 , and the other end of the first elastic member 710 and the second surface of the first rotating member 410 Butt against each other. That is, when the first rotating member 410 moves to the right on the first support column 720, the first elastic member 710 will be compressed, and at the same time, the first elastic member 710 also has an elastic force acting on the first rotating member 410 from left to right.

Through the above structure, the detected function in Embodiment 12 can also be completed, ensuring that the developing device is successfully detected by the image forming device and operates normally.

Example 14

The main difference between this embodiment and Embodiment 12 is that the structures of the translational component 420 and the first rotating component 410 are optimized.

As shown in Figures 115 to 117, the structure of the first contact protrusion 412 on the first rotating member 410 in this embodiment is different from that in Embodiment 12, but the first contact protrusion 412 in this embodiment is different from that in Embodiment 12. The function of the first contact protrusion 412 is the same, and except for the first contact protrusion 412, the other structures are the same. The first contact protrusion 412 is located on the outer circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131 , and the first contact protrusion 412 extends radially along the first cylinder 4131 . The first contact protrusion 412 includes a first contact arc surface 4122 (ie, a first driving surface) and a first contact end 4121. The arc surface 4122 is an arc surface extending in the first direction from an end close to the gear portion 4104 to an end far away from the gear portion 4104 of the first contact protrusion 412 . The first contact end 4121 is an end of the first contact protrusion 412 away from the gear portion 4104. In the first direction, the first contact end 4121 is further away from the first end 110 of the box body 100 than the first cylinder 4131. The first contact protrusion 412 can move along with the rotation of the first rotating member 410 . In other embodiments, the first contact protrusion 412 can also extend directly from the end surface of the gear portion 4104 in the first direction; Connections where the circumferential surface is formed in one piece.

When the first rotating member 410 rotates with the stirring gear 310, the first contact end 4121 is used to contact the first flat portion 6127, the concave position and the protruding portion on the contact member 612 in sequence. When 4121 changes contact with the contact part on the contact member 612 (for example, the first contact end 4121 changes from contact with the first concave position B1 on the contact member 612 to contact with the third tip T3), A contact arc surface 4122 is used to contact the inclined surface between the contact parts on the contact member 612. Since the first contact arc surface 4122 matches the shape of the inclined surface on the contact member 612, contact and switching can be made more efficient. Smooth to prevent the first contact protrusion 412 from being affected by excessive resistance from the contact member 612 during the rotation of the first rotating member 410 and thereby affecting the detection.

In a possible implementation, a spherical protrusion 424 is provided at one end of the translational member 420 , and the spherical protrusion 424 offsets the first rotating member 410 .

As shown in Figure 117, the function of the translation member 420 in this embodiment is the same as that in Embodiment 4. In this embodiment, the translation member 420 includes an integrally formed first rod portion 428 and a first driven portion 421 . The first rod part 428 is partially installed on the first chute 172, and the translation member 420 is limited by the first limiting part 173 to prevent the translation member 420 from falling off the first chute 172 and at the same time, the first rod part 428 can pass through. The limiting through hole on the first limiting portion 173 moves left and right in the first direction, that is, the first rod portion 428 is partially located in the first slide groove 172 and is partially located in the movable grooves 174 at both left and right ends through the limiting through hole. In this embodiment, the first driven part 421 is a block. The first driven part 421 is close to the first end 110 of the box 100 and is connected to an end of the first rod part 428 close to the first end 110. The first driven part 421 is close to the first end 110 of the box 100. The first driven portion 421 can move in the movable groove 174 located at the right end of the first chute 172. The right end of the first driven portion 421 has an end and the end is always located outside the first chute 172. A spherical protrusion 424 is provided on the end. .

In this embodiment, the spherical protrusion 424 is used to contact the contact surface 4106 of the first rotating member 410 to reduce the contact area, thereby reducing the friction generated when the first driven part 421 contacts the first rotating member 410 force to reduce the impact of friction on the rotation of the first rotating member 410.

Example 15

As shown in Figures 118-127, in this embodiment, the first rotating member 410 includes a first cylinder 4131, a second cylinder 4132 and a third cylinder 4133 arranged coaxially. The axial directions of the first cylinder 4131, the second cylinder 4132 and the third cylinder 4133 are all parallel to the first direction. The diameter of the first cylinder 4131 is larger than that of the second cylinder 4132, and the diameter of the second cylinder 4132 is larger than that of the third cylinder 4133. There is a first interval in the radial direction between the circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131 and the second cylinder 4132, and there is a radial gap between the circumferential surface of the second cylinder 4132 and the circumferential surface of the third cylinder 4133. Second interval. A second connecting portion 4134 is provided at the first interval to connect the left end of the first cylinder 4131 and the left end of the second cylinder 4132. The second connecting portion 4134 is six evenly spaced in the circumferential direction around the central axis of the first rotating member 410. Ribs arranged and spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. A third connection part 4135 is provided at the second interval to connect the right end of the second cylinder 4132 and the right end of the third cylinder 4133. The third connection part 4135 is in the shape of an annular sheet. The third connection part 4135 makes the second interval The right end is closed.

The gear portion 4104 is coaxially and integrally formed on the outer circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131. The gear portion 4104 meshes with the stirring gear 310. The first contact protrusion is coaxially and integrally formed on the inner circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131. 412. The first contact protrusion 412 protrudes from the inner circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131 along the radial direction toward the rotation axis of the first rotating member 410. The first contact protrusion 412 and the second connecting portion 4134 are spaced apart in the first direction. The first contact protrusion 412 is spaced apart from the right end of the first cylinder 4131 in the first direction. The right end of the gear portion 4104 overlaps the right end of the first cylinder 4131 in the first direction.

The first support column 720 passes through the third cylinder 4133 and rotatably supports the third cylinder 4133. The first support column 720 has an internal threaded hole 721 along the first direction, and the first rotating member 410 is sleeved on the third cylinder 4133. On a support column 720, a circular blocking piece 792 is provided on the left side of the first rotating member 410. The projection of the blocking piece 792 in the first direction coincides with the projection of the second interval in the first direction. The second screw 791 Passing through the baffle 792 from left to right and threadedly connected to the internal threaded hole 721, the second screw 791 presses the baffle 792 against the left end of the third barrel 4133, so that the first rotating member 410 is positioned on the first support The column 720 prevents the first rotating member 410 from coming out of the first support column 720 during movement. A first elastic member 710 is provided in the second interval. The first elastic member 710 is a compression spring, and the right end of the first elastic member 710 is connected to the third The portion 4135 abuts and the left end abuts the baffle 792, and the compression spring causes the first rotating member 410 to receive an elastic force to the right.

The contact member 612 is provided on the side of the first protective cover 610 facing the first end 110 . The contact member 612 includes a first protrusion 6123 , a second protrusion 6124 and a third protrusion 6125 . The first support column 720 is located on the first protrusion 6123 . The protective cover 610 is on the side facing the first end 110 . The first protrusion 6123, the second protrusion 6124 and the third protrusion 6125 are arranged around the first support column 720 along the circumferential direction and are spaced apart from each other. The first protrusion 6123, The second protruding portion 6124 and the third protruding portion 6125 both have an arc shape with equal radii and a center coincident with the rotation axis of the first rotating member 410 . The first protruding portion 6123 , the second protruding portion 6124 and the third protruding portion 6125 all protrude leftwards along the first direction from the side of the first protective cover 610 facing the first end 110 .

The side of the first protective cover 610 facing the first end 110 is defined here as the opposite surface. The first protruding portion 6123 is provided with a first driving surface I1 and a first flat portion 6127. In the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410, The distance from the upstream end of the first driving surface I1 to the opposite surface is smaller than the distance from the downstream end of the first driving surface I1 to the opposite surface. The first flat portion 6127 is located downstream of the first driving surface I1 in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410, and the first flat portion 6127 is connected to the downstream end of the first driving surface I1. The left end of the first flat portion 6127 is the first interference surface, and the distance from the first interference surface to the opposite surface is equal to the distance from the downstream end of the first driving surface I1 to the opposite surface. The second protruding portion 6124 has a second driving surface I2 and a second tip T2, and the third protruding portion 6125 has a third driving surface I3 and a third tip T3. For example, the first driving surface I1, the second driving surface I2 and the third driving surface I3 are all inclined surfaces inclined in the first direction. The third protrusion 6125 is located downstream of the second protrusion 6124 in the rotation direction of the first rotary member 410. The third protrusion 6125 has the same structure as the second protrusion 6124. Only the structure of the second protrusion 6124 will be described. The second protrusion 6124 is located downstream of the first protrusion 6123 in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410, and the distance from the upstream end of the second driving surface I2 to the opposite surface is smaller than the distance from the downstream end of the second driving surface I2 to the opposite surface. distance, the upstream end of the second tip T2 is connected to the downstream end of the second driving surface I2. The left end of the second tip T2 is the second interference surface, and the distance from the second interference surface to the opposite surface in the first direction is equal to the distance from the downstream end of the second driving surface I2 to the opposite surface. There is a first slope between the first driving surface I1 and the opposite surface, a second slope between the second driving surface I2 and the opposite surface, and a third slope between the third driving surface I3 and the opposite surface. The first slope is greater than the second slope, and the second slope is equal to the third slope. The first interference surface has a first arc length in the circumferential direction, the second interference surface has a second arc length in the circumferential direction, the third interference surface has a third arc length in the circumferential direction, and the first arc length is greater than the second arc length. length, the second arc length is equal to the third arc length. The projection of the movement trajectory of the first contact protrusion 412 in the first direction overlaps with the first protrusion 6123 , the second protrusion 6124 and the third protrusion 6125 .

Exemplarily, the box body 100 is provided with a limiting structure, and the transmission member is limited to the limiting structure. The limiting structure limits the degree of freedom of the transmission parts to ensure the stability of the transmission parts.

Specifically, the limiting structure includes a first guide portion 1591 , a second guide portion 1592 and a third guide portion 1593 that are provided at the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 and protrude from the box body 100 . The translation member 420 includes a first rod part 428, a first driven part 421 and a second force applying part 4201. The first driven part 421 is in the shape of a cuboid and is located at the right end of the first rod part 428. The second force applying part 4201 Located at the left end of the first rod part 428, the second force applying part 4201 can To drive the detected piece 500 to move relative to the box body 100 . The first guide part 1591 is a pair of guide ribs arranged oppositely in the second direction. The guide ribs extend along the first direction. The first driven part 421 is movably disposed in the first guide part 1591 and is driven by the first guide part 1591 . A guide portion 1591 guides movement in the first direction and limits movement in other directions. The projection of the first driven part 421 in the first direction overlaps with the projection of the second connecting part 4134 in the first direction, and the first driven part 421 is in contact with the second connecting part 4134.

The second guide part 1592 has the same structure as the third guide part 1593. Taking the second guide part 1592 as an example, the second guide part 1592 is provided with a clamping opening, the clamping opening extends along the first direction, and the upper end of the clamping opening There is an installation opening, and the size of the installation opening in the second direction is smaller than the size of the first rod part 428 in the second direction, so that when the first rod part 428 is installed into the clamping opening through the installation opening, the second guide part 1592 produces elastic deformation. When the first rod part 428 is pressed into the clamping opening, the elastic deformation disappears so that the second guide part 1592 clamps the first rod part 428 in the clamping opening to prevent the first rod part 428 from coming out of the second part. The guide part 1592 and the third guide part 1593, the second guide part 1592 and the third guide part 1593 guide the first rod part 428 to move in the first direction and limit the movement in other directions.

The working process of the developing device provided in this embodiment is as follows. The power receiving device 320 receives the power output from the image forming device and then transmits the power to the developing roller 210, the powder feeding roller 260, and the stirring frame 270, so that the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 , the mixing rack 270 starts to rotate. At the same time, because the gear of the stirring rack 270 meshes with the gear portion 4104, the gear portion 4104 rotates counterclockwise (viewed from right to left) from the first position meshing with the stirring gear 310 to the second position not meshing with the stirring gear 310. The first position is the factory-set initial position of the developing device. The translation member 420 has a third position and a fourth position. When the translation member 420 is in the fourth position, it is further to the left than when it is in the third position. The detected piece 500 has a non-detection position and a detection position.

When the gear part 4104 is in the first position, the first contact protrusion 412 is in contact with the upstream end of the first flat part 6127. The translation member 420 is in the fourth position, and the detected member 500 is in the detection position.

During the rotation of the gear part 4104 from the first position to the second position, the first rotating member 410 rotates together with the gear part 4104, and under the action of the rightward elastic force exerted by the first elastic member 710, the first contact The protrusion 412 can always maintain contact with the first protrusion part 6123, the second protrusion part 6124 and the third protrusion part 6125.

The first contact protrusion 412 first contacts the first interference surface on the first flat portion 6127. During the process of the first contact protrusion 412 contacting the first interference surface, the translator 420 remains in the fourth position. The detected component 500 is maintained at the detection position, that is, the detected component 500 is maintained at the position where the detection component in the image forming device is turned, so that a first electrical signal with a duration of T1 is generated in the image forming device.

Then, as the first rotating member 410 rotates, the first contact protrusion 412 falls into the gap between the first protruding portion 6123 and the second protruding portion 6124 under the elastic force of the first elastic member 710, so that the first rotating member 410 moves to the right as a whole. During the movement of the first rotating member 410, the detected part 500 moves to the non-detection position. At this time, the detected part 500 no longer moves the detection part in the image forming device, so that the image forming device stops generating electric signal.

As the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, the first contact protrusion 412 passes through the second driving surface I2 and interferes with the second driving surface I2. The second driving surface I2 exerts a reaction force on the first contact protrusion 412, so that The first contact protrusion 412 drives the entire first rotating member 410 to move to the left, the second connecting part 4134 pushes the first driven part 421 to move to the left, and the first driven part 421 drives the entire translational member 420 to the left from the Position three moved to position four. The object to be detected 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position, causing a second electrical signal to be generated in the image forming apparatus.

Then the first contact protrusion 412 moves to contact the second interference surface of the second tip T2. Since the arc length of the second tip T2 is less than the arc length of the first flat portion 6127, the duration T2 of the second electrical signal is less than The duration of the first electrical signal is T1.

Then, as the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, under the elastic force of the first elastic member 710, the first contact protrusion 412 falls into the gap between the second protrusion 6124 and the third protrusion 6125, so that the A rotating member 410 moves to the right as a whole. The detected part 500 moves to the non-detection position without moving the detection part in the image forming device, and the image forming device stops generating electrical signals.

Then, as the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, the first contact protrusion 412 passes the third protrusion 6125, and its movement process and principle are the same as when the first contact protrusion 412 passes the second protrusion 6124. The first contact protrusion 412 passes through the second protrusion 6124. When the protrusion 412 passes the third protrusion 6125, a third electrical signal is generated, and since the arc length of the third tip T3 is equal to the arc length of the second tip T2, the duration of the third electrical signal is T3=T2.

Then, as the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, the first contact protrusion 412 falls into the gap between the third protruding portion 6125 and the first protruding portion 6123, and the first rotating member 410 moves to the right as a whole again, causing translation. The component 420 moves to the third position, and the detected component 500 moves to the non-detection position, thereby ending the third electrical signal.

Then, as the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, the first contact protrusion 412 passes the first driving surface I1. Since the slope of the first driving surface I1 is larger than the second driving surface I2 and the third driving surface I3, the first contact protrusion 412 passes through the first driving surface I1. When the contact protrusion 412 passes through the first driving surface I1, the speed at which the first rotating member 410 moves to the left as a whole is greater than the speed at which the first rotating member 410 as a whole moves to the left when the first contact protrusion 412 passes through the second driving surface I2. The speed at which the first rotating member 410 as a whole moves to the left when the connecting protrusion 412 passes the third driving surface I3. Since the first rotating member 410 moves to the left The translation member 420 moves from the third position to the fourth position, and the detected member 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position and generates a fourth electrical signal.

At the same time, the gear part 4104 moves to the second position to complete the entire detection process. Therefore, after the detection, since the gear part 4104 is no longer meshed with the stirring gear 310, the first rotating member 410 cannot continue to rotate, so that the detected part 500 is maintained at the detection position. The fourth electrical signal is continuously generated in the image forming device.

In addition, in this embodiment, the slope of the first driving surface I1 is larger than the second driving surface I2 and the third driving surface I3. Therefore, when the fourth electrical signal is generated, the speed V1 of the detected part 500 moving from the non-detection position to the detection position is greater than The speed V2 at which the detected part 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position when the second electrical signal is generated and the speed V3 at which the detected part 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position when the third electrical signal is generated.

The image forming device compares parameters such as the number of times of electrical signal generation, duration, interval duration, and the speed at which the detected object 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position with pre-stored parameters to determine the model, capacity, lifespan, and Old and new information to achieve the detection function.

In other embodiments, the number of protrusions of the abutment 612 may be increased or decreased to change the number of times the electrical signal is generated. The arc length corresponding to the protrusion can be extended to change the duration of the electrical signal; the interval between two adjacent protrusions can be lengthened or shortened to change the length of the interval between the electrical signals, and the slope of the upper slope of the protrusion can be changed. The slope is used to change the speed at which the detected object 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position, thereby corresponding to developing devices with different models, specifications, life spans and other information. This enables the image forming device to detect more information.

In one possible implementation, as shown in Figures 118, 119, and 123-125, the component to be detected 500 is slidably installed on the box 100, and part of the component to be detected 500 extends out of the second end 120, One end of the detected component 500 facing the first end 110 is drivingly connected to the other end of the translation component 420 .

Exemplarily, the detected piece 500 is slidably installed on the fifth end 150 of the box 100 along the second direction. Optionally, a fourth guide portion 1594 is provided on the fifth end 150 of the box body 100. The fourth guide portion 1594 includes a pair of ribs that are oppositely arranged in the first direction and are spaced apart and extend along the second direction. The detected part 500 is movably installed in the fourth guide part 1594. The detected part 500 can move in the second direction in the fourth guide part 1594 and the movement in other directions is restricted by the fourth guide part 1594. Among them, the detected part 500 has a detected part 5007, which forms a rod-shaped structure. The detected part 5007 is located on the left side of the detected part 500 and extends out of the fourth guide part 1594 and the second end 120. When the detected part 500 is located at the detection position, the detected part 5007 and the image form The detection part of the device is in contact; when the detection part 500 is in the non-detection position, the detection part 5007 is separated from the detection part of the image forming apparatus.

Optionally, a fourth elastic member 760 is connected between the detected piece 500 and the box body 100, and the fourth elastic member 760 is a tension spring. Specifically, the component to be detected 500 is also integrally formed with a first fixing post, and the fourth guide portion 1594 is integrally formed with a second fixing post. The second fixing post is located at the rear side of the component to be detected 500 , and the fourth elastic member 760 is The front end is fixed on the first fixing post, and the rear end of the fourth elastic member 760 is fixedly connected to the second fixing post. When the translation member 420 moves from the second end 120 to the first end 110 along the first direction, and when the detected member 500 is in the detection position, the fourth elastic member 760 is stretched and has elastic potential energy. The elastic force of the fourth elastic member 760 drives the detected member 500 to slide from the detection position to the non-detection position. When the translation member 420 moves from the second end 120 to the first end 110 along the first direction, the fourth elastic member 760 The elastic potential energy is released, causing the detected piece 500 to move to a non-detection position.

With this structure, when the translation member 420 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, it can drive the detected component 500 to slide relative to the box body 100. Specifically, when the translation member 420 moves from the first end 110 along the first direction, When moving toward the second end 120 , the translation component 420 drives the detected component 500 to slide from the non-detection position to the detection position.

In the first embodiment, as shown in Figures 118, 119 and 123-125, the other end of the translation member 420 is provided with a push surface 427 that is inclined to the first direction. The push surface 427 is in contact with the detected object. The parts 500 are against each other to drive the detected part 500 to slide.

A second force applying part 4201 is provided at one end of the translation member 420 toward the second end 120. A resisting surface 427 is provided on the second force applying part 4201. The resisting surface 427 has a front end and a rear end in the second direction. The front end of the pushing surface 427 is further to the right than the rear end of the pushing surface 427 . For example, when the detected component 500 is in the non-detection position, it is further back than when it is in the detection position. A second force-bearing end 5006 is provided on the right side of the detected component 500. The second force-bearing end 5006 is connected to the pushing surface. 427 is in contact with each other, and the detected part 5007, the second force-bearing end 5006 and the main body part of the detected piece 500 are integrally formed. It can be understood that the fourth elastic member 760 can ensure that the second force-bearing end 5006 remains in contact with the abutment surface 4106.

With this structure, when the translation member 420 moves from the first end 110 to the second end 120 along the first direction, the push surface 427 on the translation member 420 pushes the detected component 500, and under the action of the push surface 427, the detected component 500 is moved. The detection component 500 slides relative to the box body 100 and is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the second direction, so that the detected component 500 slides from the non-detection position to the detection position.

The structure of the detected component 500 provided in this embodiment is also applicable to other developing devices with a translational component 420 , which does not rotate relative to the box body 100 .

Example 16

As shown in Figures 128 and 129, in one possible implementation, based on Embodiment 15, the transmission unit further includes a third rotating member 440. The third rotating member 440 is located outside the first rotating member 410 and It is slidingly connected with the first rotating member 410, and the third rotating member 440 is drivingly connected with the transmission assembly.

For example, the third rotating member 440 is composed of an outer cylinder 444 and a gear part 4104, and the first rotating member 410 is composed of a second cylinder 4132 and a third cylinder 4133. The left end of the second cylinder 4132 protrudes integrally in the radial direction and away from the central axis of the second cylinder 4132 to form an annular boss. The annular boss is connected to the circumferential surface of the outer cylinder 444 . The sliding keys 41421 are integrally formed along the radial direction on the circumferential surface of the annular boss, and the inner circumferential surface of the outer cylinder 444 is provided with a sliding key 41421 along the first direction. The sliding groove 4441 cooperates with the sliding key 41421. The sliding key 41421 can slide in the first direction along the sliding groove 4441, so that the first rotating member 410 can move left and right along the sliding groove 4441 in the first direction.

The outer cylinder 444 is sleeved on the first protruding part 6123, the second protruding part 6124 and the third protruding part 6125 of the abutting member 612 and is accessible to the first protruding part 6123, the second protruding part 6124 and the third protruding part 6125. Rotating support. The first rotating member 410 is supported by the first support column 720 to be rotatable and movable left and right. The third rotating member 440 is indirectly supported by the first supporting column 720 through the first rotating member 410 . The first contact protrusion 412 is provided on the outer circumferential surface of the second cylinder 4132 of the first rotating member 410 .

With this structure, when the first rotating member 410 rotates, the first rotating member 410 will not move left and right, making the meshing between the gear portion 4104 and the stirring gear 310 more stable.

Example 17

The difference between this embodiment and Embodiment 15 is that the translational member is eliminated.

As shown in Figures 130 to 134, in one possible implementation, the transmission member includes a swing member 430, which is pivotably installed on the box body 100, and the swing member 430 can rotate relative to the box body 100. Pivot axis swings.

The fifth end 150 of the box body 100 is integrally provided with a swing shaft 1504 extending upward along the third direction. The swing shaft 1504 is equipped with a swing member 430 that can swing around the swing shaft 1504, wherein the pivot axes are parallel. in the third direction. The swinging member 430 includes a first connecting section 4391, a second connecting section 4392 and a first pivoting part 4393. The first pivoting part 4393 is mounted on the swinging shaft 1504 and is pivotable around the swinging axis 1504. The first connecting section 4391 The first connecting section 4391 and the second connecting section 4392 are integrally formed with the first pivoting section 4393. From right to left, the first connecting section 4391, the first pivoting section 4393 and the second connecting section 4392 are arranged in sequence. The right end of the first connecting section 4391 is the first driven end, the left end of the first connecting section 4391 is integrally connected to the first pivot part 4393, and the second connecting section The right end of the segment 4392 is integrally connected to the first pivot portion 4393 . A second positioning part 43911 is integrally formed on the first connecting section 4391, a third positioning part 1505 is integrally formed on the fifth end 150 of the box body 100, and a third elasticity is installed between the second positioning part 43911 and the third positioning part 1505. member 750, and the third elastic member 750 is a tension spring.

The swinging member 430 is in contact with the left end surface (ie, the abutment surface) of the first rotating member 410, so the swinging member 430 can be driven by the displacement of the first rotating member 410 in the first direction to swing at the first swing position and the second swinging position. Swing around the swing axis 1504 between positions.

With this structure, when the first rotating member 410 is displaced relative to the box body 100 in the first direction, the first rotating member 410 drives the swinging member 430 to swing around the pivot axis, and the swinging member 430 causes the detected object to be detected by the swinging member 430 . The member 500 moves between a detection position and a non-detection position.

In one possible implementation, one end of the swinging member 430 is against the first rotating member 410 , and the portion of the swinging member 430 between the pivot axis and the first rotating member 410 is inclined in the first direction.

Specifically, there is an included angle between the first connecting section 4391 and the second connecting section 4392. In this embodiment, the included angle is 10°. In other embodiments, the included angle can also be set to other angles.

The first driven end of the first connecting section 4391 has a driven surface 43912. When the swing member 430 is located at the first swing position and the second swing position, the driven surface 43912 intersects with the first direction, that is, the driven surface 43912 intersects with the first direction. There is an included angle between the first directions, or the driven surface 43912 is arranged to be inclined relative to the first direction. The inclination direction of the driven surface 43912 is set such that the left end of the driven surface 43912 inclines further forward than the right end. The driven surface 43912 is in contact with the first rotating member 410 .

With this structure, the part of the swinging member 430 between the pivot axis and the first rotating member 410 is tilted in the first direction, which can ensure that the first rotating member 410 will not interact with the swinging member 430 when it is displaced relative to the box 100 in the first direction. If they are stuck, it is ensured that the first rotating member 410 can reliably drive the swinging member 430 to swing.

When the first rotating member 410 moves from right to left in the first direction, the first rotating member 410 exerts a force on the driven surface 43912, so that the driven surface 43912 drives the swinging member 430 counterclockwise around the swinging axis 1504. The first swing position swings to the second swing position. When the swing member 430 moves from the first swing position to the second swing position, the angle between the driven surface 43912 and the first direction gradually increases.

When the swing member 430 moves from the first swing position to the second swing position, the detected piece 500 moves from the non-detection position to the detection position. When the detected piece 500 moves to the detection position, an electrical signal is generated in the image forming device. At the same time, the swinging member 430 stretches the third elastic member 750 so that the third elastic member 750 accumulates elastic potential energy.

When the first rotating member 410 moves from left to right in the first direction, the elastic potential energy accumulated in the third elastic member 750 is released, so that the swinging member 430 moves from the second swinging position to the first swinging position.

In this embodiment, the swing member 430 is used to transmit the power from the first end 110 of the box body 100 to the second end 120. There is no need to install a large number of gears at the second end 120 of the box body 100 for transmission. This simplifies the structure and is conducive to the miniaturization of the developing device. ization, reducing the number of parts and reducing costs.

Schematically, the box body 100 is provided with a limiting structure, and the transmission member is limited to the limiting structure. The limiting structure can improve the stability of the transmission part.

As shown in Figure 130, the limiting structure includes a third limiting part 1502 and a fourth limiting part 1503. The third limiting part 1502 and the fourth limiting part 1503 are provided on the fifth end of the box 100 through a one-time molding process. 150. The third limiting part 1502 and the fourth limiting part 1503 are respectively provided with second limiting grooves 15021 and third limiting grooves 15031 extending along the second direction. The first connecting section 4391 is located in the second limiting groove 15021 and can move relative to the second limiting groove 15021. The second connecting section 4392 is located in the third limiting groove 15031 and can move relative to the third limiting groove 15031. The second limiting groove 15021 and the third limiting groove 15031 are used to limit the movement of the swinging member 430 in the third direction, prevent the swinging member 430 from coming out of the developing device during movement, and improve transmission stability.

In a possible implementation, the box body 100 is provided with a first guide rail 152 , and the swing member 430 is provided with a guide protrusion 432 that cooperates with the first guide rail 152 .

For example, the number of the first guide rails 152 may be two, and both first guide rails 152 are disposed at the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 . Guide protrusions 432 are respectively provided on the first connection section 4391 and the second connection section 4392, wherein the guide protrusions 432 can be provided on the swing member 430 through a one-time molding process. The guide protrusions 432 on the first connecting section 4391 and the guide protrusions 432 on the second connecting section 4392 are inserted into the two first guide rails 152 in a one-to-one correspondence. The first guide rails 152 are all in arc shape. The shape of the first guide rail 152 is the same as the movement trajectory of the corresponding guide protrusion 432. The first guide rail 152 is used to limit and guide the movement of the swing member 430 to avoid deviation in the movement of the swing member 430.

As shown in Figures 130-134, the detected component 500 is fixedly installed on the end of the swinging component 430 located at the second end 120 of the box body 100. The detected piece 500 may be integrally formed on the swinging member 430 , or the detected piece 500 may be fixed on the swinging member 430 by bonding or tightening with fasteners.

Optionally, as shown in Figures 188 to 193, the detected part 500 and the swinging part 430 are two independent parts.

In a possible implementation, as shown in Figures 188-190, the other end of the swinging member 430 is provided with a mounting groove 431, the detected component 500 is slidably installed on the box 100, and one end of the detected component 500 extends into It is in the mounting groove 431 and can swing in the mounting groove 431. There is a gap between the bottom of the mounting groove 431 and the end of the detected piece 500.

The swing member 430 includes a first connecting section 4391, a second connecting section 4392 and a first pivoting part 4393. The first pivoting part 4393 is rotatably installed on the box body 100. The first connecting section 4391 and the second connecting section 4392 They are all integrally connected to the first pivot part 4393, and from right to left are the first connecting section 4391, the first pivoting part 4393 and the second connecting section 4392.

The mounting groove 431 is integrally formed at the left end of the second connecting section 4392. The mounting groove 431 is trapezoidal. The left end of the mounting groove 431 is open and the right end is closed. The size of the left end of the mounting groove 431 is smaller than the size of the right end of the mounting groove 431. Schematically, the component to be detected 500 is slidably installed on the box body 100 along the second direction. The right end of the component to be detected 500 extends into the mounting groove 431 and can swing in the mounting groove 431. There is a gap between the bottom of the mounting groove 431 and the right end of the component to be detected 500. Those skilled in the art can set the gap as needed. The specific size is to ensure that the swing member 430 will not interfere with the detected piece 500 during the swing process.

This structure ensures that the detection part of the image forming device can be reliably moved when the detection part 500 is at the detection position, and can reduce the space occupied by the detection part 500 at the second end 120 when it is moving, thereby facilitating the miniaturization of the developing device. .

In the first embodiment, continuing to refer to Figures 188-190, a limiting plate 570 is provided on the component to be detected 500, and a limit plate 570 is provided between the bottom of the installation groove 431 and one end of the component to be detected 500 that extends into the installation groove 431. The second elastic member 740. One end of the second elastic member 740 is connected to the detected component 500 and the other end is connected to the swinging member 430 . The second elastic member 740 is used to drive the limiting plate 570 to offset the box body 100 .

Among them, the limiting plate 570 can be disposed at the middle position of the detected piece 500 through an integral molding process. The right end of the limiting plate 570 is provided with a mounting arm 5008 through an integral molding process. The mounting arm 5008 is inserted and installed through the opening at the left end of the mounting slot 431 In the groove 431, and because the installation groove 431 is trapezoidal, the installation arm 5008 can swing in the installation groove 431. Exemplarily, the second positioning post 5009 is integrally formed on the mounting arm 5008, the third positioning post 43921 is integrally formed in the installation groove 431, and the second elastic member 740 is connected between the second positioning post 5009 and the third positioning post 43921. , one end of the second elastic member 740 is fixedly connected to the second positioning post 5009, and the other end is fixedly connected to the third positioning post 43921.

A fourth limiting portion 1503 is provided on the fifth end 150 of the box body 100. The fourth limiting portion 1503 extends along the second direction. A third limiting groove is formed between the fourth limiting portion 1503 and the box body 100. 15031. The limiting plate 570 is in contact with the fourth limiting part 1503. The limiting plate 570 is pressed against the fourth limiting part 1503 under the elastic force of the second elastic member 740 so that it can move forward and backward along the fourth limiting part 1503. Make linear motion in the direction. The mounting arm 5008 passes through the third limiting groove 15031 and is inserted into the mounting groove 431.

When the swing member 430 swings, the mounting arm 5008 is driven by the second connecting section 4392 to move in the front and rear direction, and the mounting arm 5008 can move in the first direction relative to the mounting groove 431. At the same time, because the mounting groove 431 is trapezoidal, the mounting arm 5008 It can swing in the installation groove 431 to prevent the installation arm 5008 from getting stuck in the installation groove 431.

The upper end of the installation groove 431 is open, so that the upper end of the installation groove 431 is not closed, so that the installation arm 5008 is exposed outside the installation groove 431, thereby facilitating the second positioning post 5009 and the third positioning when the installation arm 5008 is inserted into the installation groove 431. The second elastic member 740 is installed on the column 43921.

In this structure, the cooperation between the limiting plate 570 and the fourth limiting portion 1503 on the box body 100 can guide and limit the detected component 500, and the elastic force of the second elastic member 740 is used to avoid the limiting plate. 570 is separated from the fourth limiting part 1503.

In the second embodiment, as shown in Figures 191 to 193, the box 100 is provided with a limiting track 151, and the detected piece 500 is provided with a first limiting protrusion 580. The first limiting protrusion 580 extends into the limit. In the positioning rail 151 , the first limiting protrusion 580 is slidingly connected with the positioning rail 151 .

The limiting track 151 is located at the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 and extends along the second direction. The first limiting protrusion 580 can be disposed on the component to be detected 500 through an integral molding process. The first limiting protrusion 580 is inserted into the limiting track 151 and can move linearly in the second direction along the limiting track 151 . The mounting arm 5008 extends rightward from the right end of the component to be detected 500. The mounting arm 5008 passes through the third limiting groove 15031 and is inserted into the mounting groove 431 at the left end of the second connecting section 4392.

When the swing member 430 swings, the mounting arm 5008 drives the detected component 500 to move in the front and rear direction along the limiting track 151, thereby causing the detected component 500 to move between the detection position and the non-detection position. When the detected component 500 is located at the detection position, When in position, the detected component 500 contacts the detecting component in the image forming device, causing the image forming device to generate an electrical signal.

The detected component 500 provided in this embodiment is also applicable to other developing devices having a swing component 430 .

Example 18

As shown in Figure 1.7, Figure 136 and Figure 137, a first protective cover 610 is installed on the first end 110 of the box body 100. The first protective cover 610 is detachably installed on the box body 100. The first protective cover 610 is not suitable for feeding powder. The roller 260 performs axial limiting. The first protective cover 610 includes a first guide 618 , a first forced push protrusion 616 , a third installation groove 619 , a second opening 614 and a hole 613 . The contact piece 612 is installed on the first protective cover 610 . The first guide 618 is a cylindrical protrusion protruding outward along the first direction. The first guide 618 is used to cooperate with the first guide portion 31 on the drum assembly to guide the developing device when the developing device is installed on the drum assembly. Upon successful installation onto the drum assembly, the first guide 618 is closer to the third end 130 relative to the fourth end 140 in the first direction. The first forced pushing protrusion 616 is located at the rear end of the first protective cover 610. The first forced pushing protrusion 616 protrudes in a direction away from the developing roller 210. The first forced pushing protrusion 616 may be U-shaped, C-shaped, or V-shaped. The first forced protrusion 616 is a shaped protrusion, and is used to cooperate with the first force-applying member 71 on the drum assembly when the developing device is installed on the drum assembly, and receive the urging force exerted by the drum assembly on the developing device. The third installation groove 619 is located at the bottom of the first protective cover 610. The third installation groove 619 is recessed upward from the bottom of the first protective cover 610 in the third direction. The third installation groove 619 is provided with a buckle. In the second direction, On the other hand, the third mounting groove 619 is closer to the third end 130 than the fourth end 140 . The bracket 830 of the identification component can be detachably mounted on the first protective cover 610 through buckles. The edge of the second opening 614 is provided with an annular protrusion, which can be used to protect the power receiving device 320. The second opening 614 exposes the power receiving portion 321 of the power receiving device 320 along the first direction, so that the power receiving portion 321 can receive the power from the power receiving device 320. The power output by the image forming device. The hole 613 is located at the rear end of the first protective cover 610 in the second direction and penetrates the first protective cover 610 in the third direction. The contact between the transmission member and the first rotating member 410 can be observed through the hole 613 . The contact member 612 is an annular structure on the side of the first protective cover 610 facing the first end 110 .

As shown in FIGS. 137 , 138 and 140 , the difference between the contact member 612 provided in this embodiment and the contact member 612 in Embodiment 4 is that the contact member 612 is provided with a reset protrusion 6126 . Correspondingly, the first rotating member 410 is also provided with a second contact protrusion 415. The reset protrusion 6126 is configured to abut the second contact protrusion 415. The reset protrusion 6126 provides the second contact protrusion 415 with the first rotating member. 410 rotational force.

Figure 137 shows that the contact member 612 provided in this embodiment also includes a first protruding portion 6123 and a second protruding portion 6124. The first driving surface I1 is provided on the first protruding portion 6123, and the second driving surface I2 is provided on the first protruding portion 6123. On the second protruding part 6124, the first protruding part 6123 and the second protruding part 6124 have different lengths in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410.

It can be understood that when the first contact protrusion 412 abuts one end of the first protrusion 6123 or the second protrusion 6124 toward the first end 110, the first rotating member 410 causes the detected member 500 to be in the detection position through the transmission member. At this time, the detection circuit in the image forming apparatus generates an electrical signal. It can be understood that as the first rotating member 410 rotates, the image forming device generates electrical signals multiple times, and the duration of the electrical signals is different. The image forming device can detect more information about the developing device through electrical signals of different durations.

137 and 138 show that the reset protrusion 6126 is located inside the first flat portion 6127. The reset protrusion 6126 has an ascending surface 61261 and a descending surface 61262. The ascending surface 61261 extends in the direction of rotation of the first rotating member 410 in a direction close to the first end 110 , and the descending surface 61262 extends in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410 . Extending in the direction away from the first end 110 , the rising surface 61261 and the falling surface 61262 may be inclined surfaces or arc surfaces.

The contact member 612 provided in this embodiment also includes a third protrusion 6125, and the third protrusion 6125 also has a third driving surface I3. There is a third included angle θ3 between the third driving surface I3 and the first recessed position B1. There is a second included angle θ2 between the second driving surface I2 and the second recessed position B2. The first driving surface I1 and the third recessed position are There is a first included angle θ1 between B3. The first included angle θ1 is smaller than the second included angle θ2 and the third included angle θ3, that is, the first driving surface I1 is more inclined to the first direction relative to the second driving surface I2 and the third driving surface I3. .

Figure 138 shows that the contact member 612 is also provided with a fixing position H3. The fixing position H3 is a depression located between the first protruding portion 6123 and the first flat portion 6127 in the circumferential direction and is recessed in a direction away from the first end 110 department.

The above arrangement facilitates the resetting of the detected component 500 and the first rotating component 410. When the detected component 500 needs to be reset, the first rotating component 410 only needs to be manually rotated along the rotation direction of the first rotating component 410. While the first rotating member 410 is rotating, the second contact protrusion 415 first moves on the rising surface 61261 along the extending direction of the rising surface 61261, that is, the first rotating member 410 is contacted by the rising surface 61261. When the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, the second contact protrusion 415 moves from the ascending surface 61261 to the descending surface 61262 and moves along the extending direction of the descending surface 61262. Under the action of the descending surface 61262, the meshing section 4101 of the first rotating member 410 and the stirring gear 310 During the reset process, the first contact protrusion 412 is located at the fixed position H3 to prevent interference during the reset of the first rotating member 410. After the reset is completed, the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the contact member again. The first flat portion 6127 of 612.

As shown in Figure 1.7 and Figure 139, the second protective cover 620 is located at the second end 120 of the box body 100. The second protective cover 620 includes a window 622 and a second forced push protrusion 629. The window 622 is used to expose part of the detected piece 500. , so that the detected part 500 can trigger the detection part of the image forming apparatus. The second forced pushing protrusion 629 protrudes in a direction away from the developing roller 210. The second forced pushing protrusion 629 may be a U-shaped, C-shaped, or V-shaped protrusion. In this embodiment, the first forced pushing protrusion 616 is connected to the first forced pushing protrusion 629. The two forced push protrusions 629 are arranged overlapping in the first direction, in other embodiments The two can be set without overlapping or only one pushing part can be set. The second forced protrusion 629 is used to cooperate with the second urging member 72 on the drum assembly when the developing device is installed on the drum assembly, and receive the urging force exerted by the drum assembly on the developing device. The first forced pushing protrusion 616 and the second forced pushing protrusion 629 are respectively under the action of the first force applying member 71 and the second force applying member 72 so that the developing device always has a tendency to approach the photosensitive drum 80 so that the developing roller 210 is in close contact with the photosensitive drum 80 to ensure image quality.

As shown in Figure 139, the second end 120 of the box body 100 is also provided with a second mounting bracket 1202. The second mounting bracket 1202 is used to support the end of the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 close to the second end 120 in the first direction. . The second mounting bracket 1202 is provided with a second guide 12022, and the second guide 12022 is used to cooperate with the second guide portion 41 on the drum assembly to guide the installation of the developing device during the installation of the developing device to the drum assembly. Illustratively, when the second groove 131 is provided on the box body 100, the conductive member 910 and the second groove 131 do not overlap in the first direction.

As shown in Figure 139, the second end 120 of the box body 100 is also provided with a powder filling port 1206. The powder filling port 1206 penetrates the side wall of the second end 120 in the first direction, and the developer can be poured into the box through the powder filling port 1206. into the box 100. In order to prevent the developer from leaking, a matching powder filling cap will be provided at the powder filling port 1206.

As shown in Figure 1.11, Figure 135, Figure 140 and Figure 141, the first rotating member 410 is rotatably installed on the first end 110 of the box body 100 and can move in the first direction relative to the developing device. The first rotating member 410 includes a gear portion 4104, a first cylinder 4131, a contact surface 4106, a second cylinder 4132, a third cylinder 4133, a first mounting hole 4105, a first contact protrusion 412, and a second contact surface. Protrusion 415 and second acceleration part 41013. The gear part 4104 includes a meshing section 4101 and a notch section 4102. The meshing section 4101 can mesh with the stirring gear 310 to receive the power transmitted by the stirring gear 310, so that the first rotating member 410 rotates in the R direction shown in Figure 1.11. The abutting surface 4106 is an end surface of the first rotating member 410 facing the first end 110 . Both the first abutting protrusion 412 and the second abutting protrusion 415 protrude radially outward based on the circumferential surface of the second cylinder 4132 (or the first abutting protrusion 412 may be formed on the circumferential surface of the first cylinder 4131 The inner circumferential surface protrudes radially inward), that is, the first abutment protrusion 412 and the second abutment protrusion 415 are located radially inside the first cylinder 4131 and outside the second cylinder 4132. The rotation radius of the first contact protrusion 412 is greater than the rotation radius of the second contact protrusion 415 . In the first direction, the end of the second contact protrusion 415 is further away from the first end 110 than the end of the first contact protrusion 412 . The first contact protrusion 412 is used to interact with the contact piece 612 on the first protective cover 610. When the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the first flat portion 6127, the third protrusion 6125, and the second protrusion 6124 and the first protrusion 6123, the first rotating member 410 has a first position in the first direction, and when the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the first recessed position B1, the second recessed position B2 and the third recessed position At time B3, the first rotating member 410 has a second position in the first direction, and in the first direction, the first position is closer to the first end 110 than the second position. The second contact protrusion 415 is used to contact the reset protrusion 6126.

As shown in Figures 142 and 143, the box body 100 includes an upper cover 170. The fifth end 150 of the box body 100 is formed on the upper cover 170. The upper cover 170 includes a first support column 720, a support portion 176, a first guide Track 152, first mounting buckle 1702 and third groove 1703. The first support column 720 is a protrusion protruding away from the first end 110 along the first direction. The first mounting hole 4105 of the first rotating member 410 is installed on the first support column 720. The first rotating member 410 can be relative to the first supporting column 720. The support column 720 rotates and moves in the first direction. The support portion 176 is a cylindrical protrusion protruding upward along the third direction. The first guide rail 152 is a strip groove extending generally along the second direction and recessed in the third direction. The first guide rail 152 is provided with a first groove extending along the second direction from the rear wall of the first guide rail 152 . Positioning protrusion 116 (not shown). In this embodiment, the first guide rail 152 is closer to the first end 110 relative to the second end 120 in the first direction. In other embodiments, the first guide rail 152 can be in The first direction is closer to the second end 120 relative to the first end 110 . The first mounting buckles 1702 are buckles that protrude upward in the third direction. In this embodiment, the number of the first mounting buckles 1702 is six. This embodiment does not limit the number of the first mounting buckles 1702 , which can be done according to actual needs. set up. The third grooves 1703 are a plurality of grooves that are depressed downward along the third direction. The plurality of grooves are arranged along the first direction. The third grooves 1703 are used to enhance the strength of the box body 100 . The developing device also includes a cover 194, which is located above the upper cover 170 in the third direction. The cover 194 is provided with a second mounting buckle 1941 or a mounting through hole 501 that cooperates with the first mounting buckle 1702. The cover 194 can The disassembled one is installed on the upper cover 170 .

In this embodiment, the transmission member is a swing member 430. As shown in Figures 143 to 145, the swing member 430 includes a first force-bearing end 43913, a first pivot portion 4393, a guide protrusion 432, a first connecting section 4391 and Second connection section 4392. The first pivot part 4393 is provided with a third positioning hole. The third positioning hole is a through hole that penetrates the swing member 430 in the third direction. The third positioning hole is sleeved on the support part 176 so that the swing member 430 is installed. The first force-bearing end 43913 is located at the right end of the swing member 430 in the first direction. The first force-bearing end 43913 is used to be contacted by the first rotating member 410 so that the swing member 430 swings with the third positioning hole as a swing point. The first force-receiving end 43913 includes a second force-receiving part 43914 and a fifth limiting part 43915. The second force-receiving part 43914 is an inclined plane extending backward in the second direction and rightward in the first direction, that is, the second There is an included angle between the extending direction of the force-receiving portion 43914 and the first direction. Specifically, the second force-receiving portion 43914 is in contact with the contact surface 4106 of the first rotating member 410 . When the first rotating member 410 moves from the second position to the first position in the first direction, the first force-bearing end 43913 of the swinging member 430 is contacted by the first rotating member 410 and swings along the R1 direction, and the entire swinging member 430 Swinging occurs around the first pivot portion 4393. It can be known It should be noted that the swing direction of the swing member 430 intersects with the first direction, and is preferably parallel to the third direction. It can be understood that the cover 194 can protect the swinging member 430 .

The guide protrusion 432 is a protrusion protruding toward the fifth end 150 along the second direction, and the guide protrusion 432 is closer to the first force-bearing end 43913. When the swing member 430 is installed on the upper cover 170 , the guide protrusion 432 is located in the first guide rail 152 . The first connecting section 4391 is located between the first pivoting part 4393 and the first force-bearing end 43913 in the first direction, and the second connecting section 4392 is located between the first pivoting part 4393 and the swinging member 430 in the first direction. The length between one end, that is, the first connecting section 4391 and the second connecting section 4392 depends on whether the first pivot part 4393 is closer to the first end 110 or the second end 120 in the first direction. It can be seen that this embodiment does not limit the positions of the first pivot part 4393 and the support part 176 and the inclination angle of the second force-receiving part 43914. When the first pivot part 4393 and the support part 176 are closer to the first end 110 , that is, the smaller the length of the first connecting section 4391, the smaller the angle between the extension direction of the second force-receiving part 43914 and the first direction; when the first pivot part 4393 and the supporting part 176 are closer to the second end 120 , that is, the shorter the length of the second connecting section 4392, the greater the angle between the extension direction of the second force-receiving portion 43914 and the first direction.

In other embodiments, positioning holes may be provided on the upper cover 170 , and positioning posts matching the positioning holes may be provided on the swinging member 430 .

In other embodiments, the guide protrusion 432 is closer to the end of the swing member 430 away from the first force-bearing end 43913, and the guide protrusion 432 is located on the first guide track 152.

The developing device also includes a first elastic member 710 and a third elastic member 750. In this embodiment, the first elastic member 710 and the third elastic member 750 are preferably compression springs. The third elastic member 750 is located in the first guide rail 152. One end of the third elastic member 750 close to the fourth end 140 in the second direction is sleeved on the first positioning protrusion 116 and contacts the first guide rail 152. , one end of the third elastic member 750 away from the fourth end 140 in the second direction is sleeved on the guide protrusion 432 and contacts the swing member 430 , and the third elastic member 750 generally compresses or expands along the second direction. The third elastic member 750 is used to make the swinging member 430 swing in the opposite direction again when the contact of the first rotating member 410 is lost, so that the swinging member 430 returns to the position when it is not contacted. In other embodiments, the third elastic member 750 may be a tension spring. The tension spring is sleeved on the front end of the first guide rail 152 at one end far away from the fourth end 140 in the second direction, and is sleeved on the end close to the fourth end 140 . on the swing member 430. The first elastic member 710 is installed on the first support column 720 along the first direction and is supported by the first support column 720. The first elastic member 710 is close to one end of the first end 110 and the side of the first end 110 in the first direction. The wall abuts, the end far away from the first end 110 abuts the first rotating member 410, and the first elastic member 710 compress or stretch in the first direction. The first elastic member 710 is used to drive the first rotating member 410 to move rightward in the first direction.

As shown in Figures 143-145, the detected component 500 provided by this application is fixedly installed on the end of the swinging component 430 located at the second end 120 of the box body 100.

The following is the working process of the developing device disclosed in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the transmission unit includes a first rotating member 410 and a swinging member 430.

The developing device and the drum assembly are installed into the image forming device. When the developing device does not start working, that is, when the power receiving device 320 does not receive the power output from the image forming device, the meshing section 4101 of the first rotating member 410 meshes with the stirring gear 310 , the first contact protrusion 412 of the first rotating member 410 contacts the first flat portion 6127 and is located at the first position in the first direction, the first rotating member 410 and the swinging member 430 are in a contact state, and the detected component 500 At the detection position, the detected part 500 is in contact with the detection part in the image forming device. The detection part is located at the triggering position after being triggered by the detected part 500, which is the first trigger. The third elastic member 750 is abutted by the swinging member 430 and is in a compressed state, and the first elastic member 710 is abutted by the first rotating member 410 and is in a compressed state.

When the power receiving device 320 receives the power output from the image forming device and begins to rotate and drives the entire transmission assembly to rotate, the first rotating member 410 follows the stirring gear 310 and begins to rotate. When the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the first flat portion 6127 During the process, the first rotating component 410 is always in the first position in the first direction, the first rotating component 410 remains in mesh with the stirring gear 310 , and the first rotating component 410 remains in contact with the swinging component 430 so that the detected component 500 is located Detect location.

When the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate in the R direction, the first contact protrusion 412 is out of contact with the first flat portion 6127, and the first rotating member 410 is acted upon by the elasticity of the first elastic member 710 and moves to the right in the first direction. When the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the first concave position B1, the first rotating member 410 is located at the second position. It can be seen that the first rotating member 410 always remains in mesh with the stirring gear 310 when moving in the first direction. When the first rotating member 410 moves rightward in the first direction, the contact surface 4106 moves upward along the extension direction of the second force receiving portion 43914, so the degree of contact of the swing member 430 gradually decreases. small, and under the elastic action of the third elastic member 750, the first force-bearing end 43913 swings in the direction opposite to the R1 direction around the first pivot portion 4393, and the other end of the swing member 430 swings in the direction opposite to the R2 direction. , the swing member 430 drives the detected component 500 to move from the detection position to the non-detection position. The fifth limiting portion 43915 is used to prevent the first rotating member 410 from disengaging from the first force-receiving end 43913 after moving to the right in the first direction.

The first rotating member 410 continues to rotate in the R direction, and the first contact protrusion 412 moves from abutting against the first recess B1 to abutting on the third driving surface I3. Since the third driving surface I3 is in the first rotating member 410 extends in the direction of rotation toward the first end 110 , so the first contact protrusion 412 moves to the left in the first direction during contact with the third driving surface I3 , that is, from the second position to the third When the position moves, the first elastic member 710 is compressed. At the same time, the contact surface 4106 moves on the second force-receiving part 43914 in the direction opposite to the extension direction of the second force-receiving part 43914, and gradually increases the degree of contact with the swinging member 430, so that the first force-receiving end 43913 rotates around The first pivot part 4393 swings in the R1 direction, the other end of the swing member 430 swings in the R2 direction and drives the detected component 500 to move to the detection position, and the third elastic member 750 is compressed by the swing component 430 . When the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the third protrusion 6125, the first rotating member 410 is in the first position, and the detection member contacts the detected member 500 and is in the trigger position, which is the second trigger.

The first rotating member 410 continues to rotate in the R direction, the first contact protrusion 412 and the third protruding portion 6125 are out of contact, and the first rotating member 410 moves to the right in the first direction under the elastic action of the first elastic member 710 , when the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the second concave position B2, the first rotating member 410 is located at the second position. At the same time, the first force-bearing end 43913 of the swing member 430 swings around the first pivot portion 4393 in the direction opposite to the R1 direction under the elastic action of the third elastic member 750. The swing member 430 drives the detected component 500 to move from the detection position to Non-detection position.

The first rotating member 410 continues to rotate in the R direction, and the first contact protrusion 412 moves from abutting against the second recess B2 to abutting on the second driving surface I2. Since the second driving surface I2 is in the first rotating member 410 extends in the direction of rotation toward the first end 110 , so the first contact protrusion 412 moves to the left in the first direction during contact with the second driving surface I2 , that is, from the second position to the second position. When the position moves, the first elastic member 710 is compressed. At the same time, the contact surface 4106 moves on the second force-receiving part 43914 in the direction opposite to the extension direction of the second force-receiving part 43914, and gradually increases the degree of contact with the swinging member 430, so that the first force-receiving end 43913 moves along the Swing in the R1 direction, the third elastic member 750 is compressed by the swing member 430 . The swinging member 430 drives the detected part 500 to move to the detection position, and the detection part contacts the detected part 500 and is at the triggering position, which is the third trigger.

The first rotating member 410 continues to rotate in the R direction, the first contact protrusion 412 and the second protruding portion 6124 are out of contact, and the first rotating member 410 moves to the right in the first direction under the elastic action of the first elastic member 710 , when the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the third concave position B3, the first rotating member 410 is located at the second position. At the same time, the first force-bearing end 43913 of the swing member 430 swings around the first pivot portion 4393 in the direction opposite to the R1 direction under the elastic action of the third elastic member 750. The swing member 430 drives the detected component 500 to move from the detection position to Non-detection position.

The first rotating member 410 continues to rotate in the R direction, and the first contact protrusion 412 moves from abutting against the third recess B3 to abutting on the third driving surface I3. Since the third driving surface I3 is in the first rotating member 410 extends in the direction of rotation toward the first end 110 , so the first contact protrusion 412 moves to the left in the first direction during contact with the third driving surface I3 , that is, from the second position to the third When the position moves, the first elastic member 710 is compressed. At the same time, the contact surface 4106 moves on the second force-receiving part 43914 in the direction opposite to the extension direction of the second force-receiving part 43914, and gradually increases the degree of contact with the swinging member 430, so that the first force-receiving end 43913 moves along the Swing in the R1 direction, the third elastic member 750 is compressed by the swing member 430, and the swing member 430 drives the detected component 500 to move from the non-detection position to the detection position. When the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the first protrusion 6123, the first rotating member 410 is in the first position, the detected piece 500 is in the detection position, and the detection piece contacts the detected piece 500 and is in the triggering position, which is the third position. Triggered four times.

It can be seen that since the first included angle θ1 is smaller than the second included angle θ2 and the third included angle θ3 , the first contact protrusion 412 moves from the third concave position B3 to the first protruding portion 6123 The time is shorter than the time for moving from the second concave position B2 to the second protruding part 6124 and the time for the first concave position B1 to move to the third protruding part 6125. This embodiment does not limit the number of triggers and can be set according to actual needs. .

It can be seen that the second acceleration part 41013 is located at the left end of the first rotating member 410 and is in the shape of a groove recessed to the right. The second acceleration part 41013 includes an acceleration slope 41015, and the acceleration slope 41015 is in the rotation direction of the first rotation member 410 The upstream end is closer to the first end 110 in the first direction than the downstream end, so that when the second force receiving portion 43914 contacts the acceleration slope 41015, it can be further accelerated to force the swing member 430 to obtain a faster swing speed. Schematically, while the first contact protrusion 412 on the first rotating member 410 moves along the first driving surface I1, the second force-receiving portion 43914 moves along the acceleration slope 41015. The above arrangement further accelerates the movement speed of the swinging member 430 and the detected member 500 to facilitate recognition by the image forming device.

When the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the first protrusion 6123, the notch section 4102 of the first rotating member 410 faces the stirring gear 310, and the first rotating member 410 no longer rotates with the stirring gear 310. The first rotating member 410 remains in contact with the swinging member 430, the detected member 500 is located at the detection position, and the image forming device completes the identification of the developing device.

In order to facilitate the reset of the first rotating member 410 and the swinging member 430, this embodiment is also provided with a reset protrusion 6126 on the abutting member 612, and is also provided with a second abutting protrusion 415 on the first rotating member 410. The rising surface 61261 of the reset protrusion 6126 extends in the direction close to the first end 110 in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410, and the descending surface 61262 extends in the direction away from the first end 110 in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410. Rising surface 61261 The descending surface 61262 can be an inclined surface or a curved surface. When it is necessary to reset the first rotating member 410 and the swinging member 430, you only need to manually continue to rotate the first rotating member 410 along the rotation direction of the first rotating member 410. While the first rotating member 410 is rotating, the second resisting member 410 is rotated. The connecting protrusion 415 first moves on the rising surface 61261 along the extending direction of the rising surface 61261, that is, the first rotating member 410 is contacted by the rising surface 61261. When the first rotating member 410 continues to rotate, the second contacting protrusion 415 moves from the rising surface 61261 Move to the descending surface 61262 and move along the extension direction of the descending surface 61262. At the same time, the first force-bearing end 43913 of the swing member 430 swings in the opposite direction to the R1 direction under the elastic action of the third elastic member 750 and moves toward the first rotating member. 410 exerts a reverse contact force. At this time, the descending surface 61262 of the reset protrusion 6126 provides the second contact protrusion 415 with a force to rotate the first rotating member 410. Between the swing member 430, the first elastic member 710 and the descending surface 61262 Under the joint action of , the tooth portion of the first rotating member 410 is meshed with the stirring gear 310 . During the reset process, the first contact protrusion 412 is located at the fixed position H3 to prevent interference during the reset of the first rotating member 410. After the reset is completed, the first contact protrusion 412 contacts the first flat portion 6127 again. .

Example 19

As shown in Figures 148 to 152, this embodiment provides a developing device, which is different from Embodiment 15 in that the structure of the transmission unit is different.

In a possible implementation, the transmission unit also includes a pivot member 480 that is rotationally installed on the box body 100. One end of the pivot member 480 is connected to the other end of the translation member 420, and the other end of the pivot member 480 is connected to the other end of the translation member 420. The object to be detected 500 is connected.

Schematically, a second rotation shaft 1501 is detachably and fixedly installed on the upper surface of the fifth end 150 of the box body 100, and a pivot member 480 is pivotably installed on the second rotation shaft 1501. The swing of the pivot member 480 The axis is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction, and there is an included angle between the swing axis of the pivot member 480 and the third direction, such that the right end of the pivot member 480 is located above the left end of the pivot member 480 in the third direction. In other embodiments, the swing axis of the pivot member 480 may also be parallel to the third direction or the left end of the pivot member 480 may be higher than the right end of the pivot member 480 in the third direction.

A second force applying part 4201 is provided at one end of the translation member 420 toward the second end 120 . The second force applying part 4201 is in the shape of a hole penetrating front and back along the second direction.

The pivot member 480 has a third arm 481, a third pivot portion 483 and a fourth arm 482. The third arm 481 and the fourth arm 482 are integrally connected to the third pivot portion 483. The third arm 481 is connected to the third pivot portion 483. The four arms 482 are sandwiched at 90° angle. In other embodiments, the angle between the third arm 481 and the fourth arm 482 can also be set to other angles. The third arm 481 is inserted into the second force applying part 4201.

A second force-bearing end 5006 is provided on the right side of the detected component 500. The second force-bearing end 5006 is in the shape of a column protruding downward along the third direction. The fourth arm 482 is provided with a U-shaped U-shaped opening. The two force-bearing ends 5006 are clamped by the U-shaped opening on the fourth arm 482.

When the translation member 420 moves from the first end 110 to the second end 120 along the first direction, the second force applying part 4201 of the translation member 420 pushes the third arm 481, so that the third arm 481 drives the pivot member 480 to rotate around the pivot member 480. The fourth arm 482 swings in the counterclockwise direction along the second rotation axis 1501, so that the fourth arm 482 pushes the detected piece 500 to displace relative to the box 100 in the second direction, and then moves from the non-detection position to the detection position.

In this embodiment, the transmission between the translation component 420 and the detected component 500 is through the pivot component 480, which is more stable than the inclined plane transmission. It is easier to adjust the transmission ratio. You only need to change the length ratio of the third arm 481 and the fourth arm 482.

Example 20

As shown in FIGS. 157 to 171 , the first rotating member 410 provided here in this embodiment is equivalent to the first rotating member 410 provided in Embodiment 3, and the first rotating member 410 is disposed through the stirring shaft 220 .

The transmission unit also includes a translational member 420 that penetrates the stirring shaft 22. One end of the translational member 420 offsets the first rotating member 410, and the other end of the translational member 420 is transmission-connected to the detected piece 500.

The translational member 420 is supported in the stirring shaft 220 so as to be movable along the first direction, and the translational member 420 is aligned with the first rotating member 410 in the first direction, so that the left end of the first rotating member 410 can push the translational member. Right end of 420.

With this structure, when the first rotating member 410 is displaced relative to the box 100 in the first direction, the translational member 420 can be pushed to move synchronously with the first rotating member 410. The movement of the translational member 420 causes the detected component 500 to detect The image forming device can move between the position and the non-detection position so that the image forming device can acquire information about the developing device.

Among them, one end of the driving member 121 facing the second end 120 does not have a steering protrusion 1211. The sliding part 1212 slides in the third chute 509 on the detected piece 500. The third chute 509 extends along the first direction and is detected. The guide protrusion 5001 of the member 500 slides in the guide portion 128 on the first connecting member 630.

In a possible implementation, as shown in Figures 157-171, the second end 120 is provided with a second protective cover 620 and a first connecting piece 630, and the detected part 500 is slidably installed on the first connecting piece 630. , the translation member 420 penetrates the first connecting member 630 , and the second matching protrusion 122 is provided on the second protective cover 620 .

Exemplarily, both the first connecting member 630 and the second protective cover 620 are detachably installed on the second end 120 of the box body 100, and the guide portion 128 is provided on the first connecting member 630. The first connecting member 630 has a guide hole 632 for the translation member 420 to pass along the first direction. The projections of the translation member 420 and the guide hole 632 along the first direction are both D-shaped. The translation member 420 can pass along the first direction. The direction movement is supported and limited by the guide hole 632, thereby preventing the translation member 420 from rotating. In the first direction, the first connecting member 630 is located between the box body 100 and the second protective cover 620 , and the interference portion 126 is provided on the second protective cover 620 . The second matching protrusion 122 on the interference portion 126 has a third transmission surface 1221. The end of the third transmission surface 1221 close to the box body 100 in the first direction is further back than the end away from the box body 100, so that the third transmission surface 1221 When the transmission surface 1221 interferes with the steering protrusion 1211, it can exert a forward movement force on the driving member 121, so that the driving member 121 can drive the detected component 500 to move forward.

The fourth elastic member 760 is a compression spring made of conductive material. The first connecting member 630 is provided with a support wall 631 protruding to the left along the first direction. The support wall 631 supports the front end of the fourth elastic member 760 , and the rear end of the fourth elastic member 760 is in contact with the detected component 500 and is electrically connected. , the fourth elastic member 760 is stretchable in the second direction. The second end 120 of the box body 100 is also detachably installed with a second connector 640. The second connector 640 is provided with a support hole for the left end of the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 to be inserted. The second connector 640 is rotatable. The left end supports the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 . The second end 120 of the box body 100 is integrally formed with a joint portion 129 protruding to the left from the second end 120 of the box body 100 . The joint portion 129 is used to receive a backward thrust from the image forming device to move the developing device backward. , so that the developing roller 210 and the photosensitive drum 80 no longer contact. The second connecting member 640 has a through hole for the joint portion 129 to pass through, and the joint portion 129 is inserted into and extends out of the through hole. The engaging portion 129 is located between the rotation axis of the developing roller 210 and the detected protrusion 508 in the second direction. In the first direction, the conductive member 910 is located between the second connecting member 640 and the box body 100 .

A contact hole 633 is opened on the support wall 631 along the second direction, and a portion of the contact hole 633 penetrates along the second direction. The first electrical contact portion 911 of the conductive member 910 abuts the fourth elastic member 760 at the contact hole 633 and conducts electricity. connect. Using the fourth elastic member 760 to conduct electricity can ensure that the detected component 500 still maintains contact and electrical connection with the fourth elastic member 760 when moving, thereby avoiding poor contact. At the same time, the first electrical contact portion 911 can also maintain close contact with the fourth elastic member 760 under the action of elastic force, thereby further preventing poor contact.

With this structure, the specific positions of the second mating protrusion 122 and the detected component 500 at the second end 120 can be set by replacing the second protective cover 620 and the first connecting member 630 . In addition, the above arrangement can also ensure the reliability of the electrical connection between the detected component 500 and the conductive component 910 .

The power receiving device 320 includes a driving gear 322 and a power receiving portion 321. The power receiving portion 321 includes a cylindrical portion 3211, a first recessed portion 3212, and a power receiving protrusion 3213. The cylindrical portion 3211 is coaxially arranged with the driving gear 322, and the first recessed portion 3212 is a cylindrical recessed space formed by being recessed from the right end of the cylindrical portion 3211 to the left. The power receiving protrusion 3213 is integrally formed in the first recessed portion 3212 . The outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 3211 is a force receiving surface. The force receiving surface is used to receive the backward thrust exerted by the image forming device to move the developing device backward so that the developing roller 210 no longer contacts the photosensitive drum 80 . Under the joint action of the force receiving surface and the joint portion 129, the forces on both sides of the developing device are ensured to be balanced, and the developing device is prevented from deflecting during the separation process of the developing roller 210 and the photosensitive drum 80.

The detected protrusion 508 of the detected component 500 has an electrical receiving surface 5082 and a detected surface 5081. The electrical receiving surface 5082 and the detected surface 5081 are continuous surfaces connected to each other. The electrical receiving surface 5082 is used to communicate with the detection component in the image forming device. The power supply terminal 101 is in contact with and electrically connected, and the detected surface 5081 is used to apply force to the detection part to cause displacement of the detection part. The rear end of the detected surface 5081 is higher than the front end, the rear end of the electrical receiving surface 5082 is connected to the front end of the detected surface 5081, and the front end of the electrical receiving surface 5082 is higher than the rear end. The connection between the electrical receiving surface 5082 and the detected surface 5081 is made to be lower than the front end of the electrical receiving surface 5082 and the rear end of the detected surface 5081 to form an electrical receiving depression, so that the detection part in the image forming device The power supply terminal 101 can be inserted into the power receiving recess to avoid relative movement between the power supply terminal 101 and the power receiving surface 5082 during operation, resulting in poor contact.

In this embodiment, when the detected part 500 is in the non-detection position, it is farther from the rotation axis of the developing roller 210 in the second direction than when the detected part 500 is in the detection position. The detected part 500 moves along the direction from the non-detection position. Move forward in the fourth direction to reach the detection position. Thus, the developing device can be detected by the image forming device and the information such as the newness, model, capacity, lifespan, etc. of the developing device can be identified.

As shown in Figures 164 to 166, this embodiment also includes a powder knife 290. The powder knife 290 includes a knife holder 280 and a blade 250. One end of the blade 250 is in contact with the circumferential surface of the developing roller 210 and the other end is in contact with the knife holder 280. Fixed connection, the knife holder 280 is detachably fixedly installed on the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 and supported by the fifth end 150, and the knife holder 280 is located at the powder outlet. The tool holder 280 includes a second mounting part 281 and a third mounting part 282. The second mounting part 281 extends generally along the second direction, and the third mounting part 282 extends generally along the third direction. The upper end of the second mounting part 281 is connected to the third mounting part 282 . The front ends of the mounting portions 282 are integrally connected to form an L-shaped tool holder 280 projected in the first direction. The blade 250 is welded to the third mounting part 282. The third mounting part 282 is also provided with a powder knife mounting hole 2823. The third mounting part 282 is fixed to the third end 130 of the box 100 through the powder knife mounting hole 2823. Third security The left and right ends of the mounting portion 282 are integrally formed with positioning grooves 2824 . The first end 110 of the box body 100 has a first inner surface opposite to the second end 120 in the first direction, and the second end 120 has a second inner surface opposite to the first end 110 in the first direction. A first positioning rib 1110 is integrally formed on the inner surface, and a second positioning rib is integrally formed on the second inner surface. The first positioning rib 1110 and the second positioning rib are respectively connected with the third mounting portion 282 The positioning grooves 2824 on the left and right ends cooperate to position and support the tool holder 280 . The lower end of the third mounting part 282 is also integrally provided with a buckle part 2825. The buckle part 2825 extends backward from the lower end of the third mounting part 282. The buckle part 2825 and the second mounting part 281 connect the third end of the box 100 130 is clamped, when the third end 130 of the box body 100 is subjected to an external force, the third end 130 of the box body 100 is supported by the buckle 2825, so that the external force received by the third end 130 is transmitted to the tool holder 280, thereby preventing the box from being The third end 130 of the body 100 deforms, causing the developer to be squeezed out, resulting in developer leakage.

In a possible implementation, as shown in FIG. 172 , a tapered portion 41020 is provided at an end of the first rotating component 410 away from the abutting component 612 , and the tapered portion 41020 resists the translational component 420 .

Among them, the tapered portion 41020 is integrally formed at the left end of the first rotating member 410. The tapered portion 41020 extends along the first direction and has a radius that gradually decreases and increases from left to right. The left end, that is, the small diameter end of the tapered portion 41020 offsets the right end of the translating member 420 . Through the above arrangement, the contact area between the first rotating component 410 and the translating component 420 can be reduced, and the friction between the first rotating component 410 and the translating component 420 can be reduced, so that the transmission unit can transmit more smoothly.

Continuing to refer to FIG. 172 , in the first direction, the contact position between the first rotating member 410 and the translating member 420 is located in the middle of the box body 100 .

For example, the contact position between the left end of the first rotating member 410 and the right end of the translating member 420 is in the middle of the box 100 relative to the box 100 in the first direction, that is, the length of the box 100 is 1/4 to 3 in the first direction. /4 length position. The length of the first rotating member 410 in the first direction and the length of the translating member 420 in the first direction are both greater than 1/4 of the length of the box body 100 in the first direction.

This structure prevents the translational member 420 or the first rotating member 410 from being too long, causing the first rotating member 410 or the translational member 420 to easily bend in the direction crossing the first direction. Improve the stability of the transmission unit.

As shown in FIGS. 173 to 178 , the detected component 500 is slidably mounted on the first connecting component 630 along the third direction. The above arrangement can ensure the reliability of the electrical connection between the detected component 500 and the conductive component 910 .

The guide portion 128 and the second guide groove 1281 extend along the third direction. The detected piece 500 is integrally formed with a guide protrusion 5001 extending along the third direction. The guide protrusion 5001 and the second guide groove are integrally formed. 1281 slidingly fits, so that the detected piece 500 can slide along the second guide groove 1281 in the third direction. The fourth elastic member 760 can be compressed in the third direction. The lower end of the fourth elastic member 760 contacts the detected component 500 and the upper end of the fourth elastic member 760 is integrally formed on the upper edge of the first connecting member 630 and along the first direction. The upward and left protruding flange abuts.

The front end surface of the guide protrusion 5001 is integrally formed with a forwardly protruding conductive rib 5003. The conductive rib 5003 moves in the third direction along the second guide groove 1281 along with the movement of the detected component 500 and the guide protrusion 5001. . The guide portion 128 has a conductive port 1282 connected to the second guide groove 1281. The conductive rib 5003 always remains at least partially exposed by the conductive port 1282 during its movement. The first electrical contact portion 911 is inserted into the conductive port 1282 and is pressed by the elastic force. It is pressed against the left end surface of the conductive rib 5003. The rear edge of the second connector 640 is integrally provided with a pressing portion 641 that protrudes and extends backward. The pressing portion 641 is used to press the first electrical contact portion 911 against the conductive rib 5003. In the third In one direction, the pressing portion 641 is located on the left side of the first electrical contact portion 911, and the first electrical contact portion 911 is located on the left side of the conductive rib 5003. In the first direction, the projection of the pressing portion 641 is in line with the first electrical contact portion. The projections of 911 and conductive ribs 5003 in the first direction at least partially overlap.

The third chute 509 is located on the rear end surface of the detected part 500 and extends along the first direction. The sliding part 1212 of the driving part 121 is integrally formed on the front end surface of the driving part 121. The steering protrusion 1211 on the driving part 121 A third transmission surface 1221 is provided on the top. In this embodiment, the inclination direction of the third transmission surface 1221 is set such that the upper end of the third transmission surface 1221 is further to the left than the lower end. The inclination direction of the third transmission surface 1221 on the two second matching protrusions 122 on the interference portion 126 on the second protective cover 620 is set such that the upper end is further to the left than the lower end.

The protrusion to be detected 508 is provided with an electric receiving surface 5082, and the inclination direction of the electric receiving surface 5082 is set such that the front end is higher than the rear end. In this embodiment, when the translation member 420 moves to the left and pushes the driving member 121 to move to the left, the third transmission surface 1221 on the driving member 121 first interferes with the third transmission surface 1221 to cause the driving member 121 to move upward. , when the third transmission surface 1221 completely passes through the third transmission surface 1221, the detected piece 500 moves downward under the elastic force of the fourth elastic member 760 and drives the driving member 121 to move downward together, and then the third transmission surface 1221 moves downward again. The interference with the third transmission surface 1221 causes the detected part 500 to move upward again. When the third transmission surface 1221 completely passes through the third transmission surface 1221 , the detected part 500 moves downward under the elastic force of the fourth elastic member 760 At the same time, the driving member 121 is driven to move downward together, and then the translation member 420 stops moving. The two upward movements of the detected protrusion 508 and the electrical receiving surface 5082 push the detection member twice, causing two electrical signals to be generated in the image forming device. Since the detection member is provided with a reset elastic member, the detection member is moved by the detected protrusion 508 After pushing to generate an electrical signal, when the detected protrusion 508 moves downward together with the detected piece 500, the reset spring The elastic member makes the detection member also swing downward, so that the detected protrusion 508 in this embodiment always remains in contact with the detection member during the movement, and the electrical receiving surface 5082 always maintains contact with the power supply terminal during the movement, so that the power supply is stable.

Example 21

As shown in FIGS. 179 to 187 , this embodiment provides a developing device. The difference between the developing device and Embodiment 20 lies in the structure of the transmission unit.

In one possible implementation, the detected component 500 is slidably mounted on the second end 120 , and the transmission unit also includes a pivoting component 480 that is rotationally mounted on the box body 100 . One end of the pivoting component 480 is in contact with the first rotating component 410 One end away from the abutting member 612 abuts against the other end of the pivoting member 480 and is provided with a driving slope. The driving slope is configured to push the detected component 500 to slide relative to the box body 100 .

In this embodiment, the stirring gear 310 is an incomplete gear.

In this embodiment, the contact member 612 includes a first protruding part 6123, a second protruding part 6124, a first spacing part 6128, and a second spacing part 61210. The first protruding part 6123, the first spacing part 6128, and the second protruding part 6124 , the second spacing parts 61210 are formed into an annular shape connected end to end. In the first direction, the left end surfaces of the first protruding part 6123 and the second protruding part 6124 are compared with the left end surfaces of the first spacing part 6128 and the second spacing part 61210. further to the left. It can be understood that the first spacing part 6128 and the second spacing part 61210 are equivalent to the recess B in Embodiment 4. As shown in FIG. 181 , in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 181 , a first driving surface I1 is provided upstream of the first protruding portion 6123 , and a second driving surface I2 is provided upstream of the second protruding portion 6124 . The first driving surface I1 and the second driving surface I2 are used to interfere with the first contact protrusion 412, so that the first contact protrusion 412 drives the first rotating member 410 to move to the left.

A second support seat 180 is provided inside the box body 100. The second support seat 180 extends downward from the inner surface of the fifth end 150 of the box body 100. The second support seat 180 is opened in a direction parallel to the first direction. There is a third support hole penetrating the second support base 180 . The left end of the mixing stand 270 is inserted into the third support hole and is rotatably supported by the third support hole. The second support base 180 is located between the second end 120 of the box body 100 and the first end 110 of the box body 100 . The mixing rack 270 is located on the right side of the second support base 180. A fourth support hole is opened on the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 between the second support base 180 and the second end 120 of the box body 100. The fourth support hole is along the The third direction penetrates the fifth end 150 of the box body 100, and a pivot member 480 is rotatably installed in the fourth support hole. The pivot member 480 can rotate around an axis parallel to the third direction.

The pivoting member 480 includes a third arm 481, a fourth arm 482 and a third pivoting part 483. The third pivoting part 483 is in the shape of a cylinder with a central axis parallel to the third direction. The third pivoting part 483 passes through the fourth arm. Support hole, third pivot part 483 The upper end is located outside the box body 100 and the lower end is located inside the box body 100. A sealing ring is installed between the third pivot portion 483 and the fourth support hole to prevent leakage of the developer in the box body 100. The third arm 481 is located in the box body 100. One end of the third arm 481 is integrally connected to the third pivot portion 483 and the other end is integrally formed with the third pivot portion 483 and moves away from the third pivot along the radial direction of the third pivot portion 483 . The fourth arm 482 is located outside the box body 100 and is fixedly connected to the third pivot portion 483 through a first locking member 484. The first locking member 484 is a screw, a buckle, or the like. One end of the fourth arm 482 is connected to the third pivot portion 483 and the other end is formed along the radial direction of the third pivot portion 483 and extending in a direction away from the third pivot portion 483 . The extending directions of the third arm 481 and the fourth arm 482 intersect with each other. The end of the third arm 481 away from the third pivot part 483 is the receiving end 4811, and the end of the fourth arm 482 away from the third pivot part 483 is the active end 4821. When the first rotating member 410 moves along the first direction, The left end of the first rotating member 410 can push the receiving end 4811 of the third arm 481, so that the third arm 481 drives the third pivot part 483 and the fourth arm 482 to rotate. A driving slope is provided at the active end 4821 of the fourth arm 482, and the front end of the driving slope is lower than the rear end.

The upper end of the detected piece 500 is integrally formed with a third driven part 5004. The third driven part 5004 protrudes upward from the upper end of the detected piece 500. The third driven part 5004 includes a driven slope 5005. The left end of the driven slope 5005 is Further up on the right end, the driven slope 5005 can cooperate with the driving slope, so that the driving slope and the driven slope 5005 can fit together, increasing the contact area and making the transmission more stable.

When the developing device is installed in the image forming device, the detection component in the image forming device is elastic, so that the detection component abuts the detected protrusion 508 and causes the detected component 500 to receive a downward force. When the stirring gear 310 receives the power of the power receiving device 320 and rotates, the stirring gear 310 drives the first rotating member 410 to rotate, and the first rotating member 410 drives the first contact protrusion 412 to first move from the first spacing part 6128 to the first protruding part. On the first driving surface I1 on 6123, it moves from the first protruding portion 6123 to the second spacer portion 61210, then moves from the second spacer portion 61210 to the second driving surface I2 of the second protruding portion 6124, and then moves from the second spacer portion 61210 to the second driving surface I2 of the second protruding portion 6124. The protruding portion 6124 moves to the first spacing portion 6128. At the same time, since the stirring gear 310 is an incomplete gear, when the first contact protrusion 412 moves to the first spacing portion 6128, the stirring gear 310 is disengaged, so that the first rotating member 410 Stop turning.

When the first contact protrusion 412 slides along the first driving surface I1 on the first protrusion 6123, the first rotating member 410 moves to the left, thereby pushing the third arm 481, so that the pivoting member 480 drives the fourth arm 482 Forward rotation, when the fourth arm 482 rotates, the active end 4821 of the fourth arm 482 contacts the driven inclined surface 5005 and exerts thrust on the driven inclined surface 5005, causing the driven inclined surface 5005 to generate an upward component force, causing the driven inclined surface to 5005 drives the third driven part 5004 and the detected part 500 to move upward, so that the detected parts on the detected part 500 The detection protrusion 508 pushes upward the detection member in the image forming device, causing an electrical signal to be generated in the image forming device, thereby detecting the developing device.

When the second receiving part moves from the first protruding part 6123 to the second spacing part 61210, since the detection part has elastic force, the detection part exerts a downward elastic force on the detected protrusion 508, so that the detected protrusion 508 drives the detected part 500 Moving downward, the driven slope 5005 on the detected piece 500 pushes the pivoting member 480 to rotate in the opposite direction, thereby causing the third arm 481 to push the first rotating member 410 to move to the right, causing the first contact protrusion 412 to enter the second Spacer 61210.

When the first contact protrusion 412 moves from the second spacer 61210 along the second driving surface I2 on the second protrusion 6124 to the second protrusion 6124, the first rotating member 410 moves to the left again, so that the pivot The rotating member 480 swings forward again, causing the detected member 500 to move upward again, so that the detecting member is pushed again, and the image forming device generates electrical signals again.

When the first contact protrusion 412 moves from the second protrusion 6124 to the first spacer 6128, the stirring gear 310 is disengaged, the first rotating member 410 stops rotating, and the elastic force of the detection member causes the detected member 500 to move downward, and the detected member 500 is moved downward. The detection component 500 reverses the pivot component 480 , and the pivot component 480 moves the first contact protrusion 412 of the first rotation component 410 to the right and falls into the first spacer 6128 . This ends the detection process. During this process, the detection element is pushed twice, causing two electrical signals to be generated in the image forming device. The image forming device determines the newness, model, capacity and other information of the developing device based on the number of times the electrical signals are generated. At the same time, the image forming device can also determine the duration of the two electrical signals (controlled by adjusting the lengths of the first protruding portion 6123 and the second protruding portion 6124) and the length of the interval between the two electrical signals (controlled by adjusting the first interval). The length of the portion 6128 and the second spacer portion 61210 is thus controlled) to determine the information of the developing device.

The stirring stand 270 in this embodiment may not have the stirring function, but only has the function of supporting the first rotating member 410 .

In the developing device provided by this embodiment, the transmission between the first rotating member 410 and the detected component 500 is through the pivoting component 480, and the transmission between the first rotating component 410 and the detected component 500 is more stable. It is easier to adjust the transmission ratio. You only need to change the length ratio of the third arm 481 and the fourth arm 482.

Example 22

As shown in Figures 194 to 201, the difference between this embodiment and the above embodiment is that the transmission unit includes a first rotating part 410 and a transmission part. The transmission part is a flexible part 401. The flexible part 401 is connected to the detected part 500 and the third part respectively. A rotating member 410 is connected in transmission.

The directions A1 and A2 are the first directions, the direction pointed by A1 is the positive direction of the first direction, and the direction pointed by A2 is the negative direction of the first direction;

The directions B1 and B2 are the second directions, the direction pointed by B1 is the positive direction of the second direction, and the direction pointed by B2 is the negative direction of the second direction; the direction B1 is also the direction close to the detection part of the image forming device, and the direction B2 is away from the image. the orientation of the test piece forming the device;

The directions C1 and C2 are the third direction, the direction pointed by C1 is the positive direction of the third direction, and the direction pointed by C2 is the negative direction of the third direction.

The first direction, the second direction and the third direction cross each other.

Among them, the first rotating member 410 is located at the first end 110 of the box 100, and the first rotating member 410 is rotatably supported by the first end 110. Specifically, the first end 110 is provided with a first support protruding along the A1 direction. The first rotating member 410 is sleeved on the first supporting column 720 and can rotate around the first supporting column 720 (that is, the rotation axis of the first rotating member 410 is along the first direction). The first rotating member 410 includes a first cylinder. A gear portion 4104 is integrally formed coaxially on the first cylinder. The gear portion 4104 is provided at an end of the first cylinder away from the first end 110 in the first direction. The gear portion 4104 Engaging with the stirring gear 310, the gear portion 4104 has a notch section 4102. When the first rotating member 410 rotates to the notch section 4102 facing the stirring gear 310, it is out of mesh with the stirring gear 310 and can no longer be driven to rotate by the stirring gear 310. Optionally, the gear portion 4104 can also mesh with other gears of the transmission assembly to receive driving force.

The flexible member 401 can be a rope, a wire or a wire, and is flexible and capable of bending. The length of the flexible member 401 is greater than the length of the box 100 and can extend from the first end 110 to the second end 120 of the box 100 .

For example, the end of the flexible member 401 can be wrapped around the first rotating member 410, or part of the flexible member 401 is located on the movement trajectory of the first rotating member 410, so that the first rotating member 410 can interfere with the flexible member 401. , thereby driving the flexible member 401 to move relative to the box body 100, so that the detected piece 500 moves relative to the box body 100.

In this structure, the first rotating part 410 and the detected part 500 are transmitted through the flexible part 401. Compared with other transmission parts, the arrangement of the flexible part 401 is more flexible, and the flexible part 401 occupies less space. It is beneficial to realize the miniaturization of the developing device.

In a possible implementation, the first rotating member 410 is provided with a first force applying part 4110 on a side facing the first end 110. The first force applying part 4110 is used to interact with the flexible member when the first rotating member 410 rotates. 401 interferes to drive the flexible member 401 to move.

As shown in Figures 195 and 199, the first force applying part 4110 can be disposed on the first cylinder of the first rotating member 410 through an integral molding process, and the first force applying part 4110 is located on the first cylinder in the first direction. At one end close to the first end 110, the first force applying part 4110 is a protrusion on the first cylinder protruding in the first direction toward the direction close to the box 100 (A2 direction). The first force applying part 4110 is in the first direction. The upward projection is at least partially located outside the projection of the first cylinder in the first direction; optionally, the projection of the first force applying part 4110 in the first direction can also be entirely located on the first cylinder in the first direction. Inside the projection, as long as the first force applying part 4110 can interfere with the flexible part 401 and drive the flexible part 401 to move when it rotates.

In this structure, when the first rotating member 410 is rotating, the first force applying part 4110 moves synchronously with the first rotating member 410, and the first force applying part 4110 is used to cause the flexible member 401 to deform, thereby realizing the relative movement of the flexible member 401. The box body 100 moves, and the flexible member 401 drives the detected component 500 to move relative to the box body 100 .

Schematically, the projection of the flexible member 401 in the first direction and the projection of the movement trajectory of the first force applying part 4110 in the first direction at least partially coincide.

Through the above arrangement, the first force applying part 4110 can interfere with the flexible member 401 and cause the flexible member 401 to move as the first rotating member 410 rotates. In addition, no other structure is required between the first rotating member 410 and the flexible member 401 to allow the flexible member 401 to move, which is conducive to simplifying the space occupied by the transmission structure at the first end 110, thereby facilitating the miniaturization of the developing device.

In other embodiments, an intermediate member may be provided between the flexible member 401 and the first rotating member 410. When the first force applying part 4110 rotates with the first rotating member 410, the intermediate member can be moved. When the intermediate member is moved, When moving, interference may occur with the flexible member 401 and cause the flexible member 401 to move.

In a possible implementation, as shown in Figures 197, 198 and 200, a first limiting block 4011 is provided at one end of the flexible member 401, and a limiting protrusion 111 is installed on the first end 110. The limiting protrusion The block 111 is provided with a first limiting hole 1111, the flexible member 401 penetrates the first limiting hole 1111, and the size of the first limiting block 4011 is larger than the size of the first limiting hole 1111.

Among them, the first limiting block 4011 is fixedly connected to the flexible member 401. The limiting bump 111 is provided on the first end 110 of the box 100 through an integral molding process and the limiting bump 111 protrudes along the A1 direction. Exemplarily, the limiting bump 111 is also provided with a first insertion opening 1112 through which the flexible member 401 can be inserted into the first limiting hole 1111. The first insertion opening 1112 and the first limiting hole 1111 The first insertion opening 1112 is connected and located on a side away from the box body 100 in the first direction compared to the first limiting hole 1111 . The size of the flexible member 401 is smaller than the size of the first limiting block 4011. After the flexible member 401 is inserted into the first limiting hole 1111 from the first insertion opening 1112, the flexible member 401 is When the flexible member 401 moves, the first limiting block 4011 abuts the first limiting hole 1111. Since the size of the first limiting block 4011 is larger than the first limiting block 4011, the flexible member 401 will not move from the first limiting block 4011. Hole 1111 emerges from.

The cooperation between the first limiting block 4011 and the limiting bump 111 is used to limit one end of the flexible member 401 toward the first end 110 to ensure that the first force applying part 4110 can drive the flexible member 401 when it interferes with the flexible member 401 401 moves relative to the box 100.

As shown in Figures 197 and 198, the first end 110 is provided with a locking protrusion 112, and an end of the locking protrusion 112 away from the first end 110 is provided with a guide slope 1121. The guide slope 1121 is configured to guide the flexible member 401 over the lock. Stop protrusion 112.

The locking protrusion 112 is provided on the first end 110 of the box body 100 through an integral molding process, and the locking protrusion 112 protrudes along the first direction on the first end 110 away from the box body 100 (direction A1). The guide slope 1121 is located at the end of the locking protrusion 112 away from the box 100 in the first direction (the end in the A1 direction), and the guide slope 1121 is located at the end close to the rope (that is, the end of the guide slope 1121 in the C1 direction). The end of the guide slope 1121 away from the flexible member 401 (that is, the end of the guide slope 1121 in the C2 direction) is closer to the box 100 in the first direction, that is, the inclination direction of the guide slope 1121 is from C1 and A2 to C2 and A1. Tilt sideways. Before the flexible part 401 is driven by the first force applying part 4110, the flexible part 401 is located on the C1 direction side of the locking protrusion 112. When the flexible part 401 is driven by the first force applying part 4110, the flexible part 401 and the locking part 4110 move. The guide slope 1121 of the blocking protrusion 112 contacts and is driven along the guide slope 1121 to one end of the guide slope 1121 in the C2 direction. After crossing one end of the guide slope 1121 in the C2 direction, it is blocked on the lower side of the blocking protrusion 112 ( C2 direction side), the flexible member 401 breaks away from the movement trajectory of the first force applying part 4110 and can no longer be driven by the first force applying part 4110.

With this structure, the image forming device can obtain the old and new information of the developing device. When the developing device completes the detection process, the flexible member 401 breaks away from the movement trajectory of the first force applying part 4110 under the obstruction of the locking protrusion 112, and the developing device that has passed the detection When the image forming device is installed again, the flexible member 401 cannot move again, so the image forming device cannot generate an electrical signal, so that the image forming device determines that the developing device is an old developing device.

As shown in Figure 195, Figure 200 and Figure 201, the detected piece 500 is rotatably installed on the second end 120, and a transition piece 123 is rotatably mounted on the second end 120. The rotation axis of the transition piece 123 is perpendicular to the first direction, and the flexible piece The other end of 401 is wrapped around the transition piece 123. The transition piece 123 is provided with a toggle protrusion 1231 for toggle the detected piece 500.

Schematically, a second protective cover 620 is installed on the second end 120 , and both the detected piece 500 and the transition piece 123 are rotatably installed on the second protective cover 620 . The rotation axis of the transition piece 123 is perpendicular to the first direction, and the rotation axis specifically extends along the second direction (B1 and B2 directions). The second protective cover 620 is provided with a first pillar 624, and the first pillar 624 extends along the second direction. The transition piece 123 is rotatably sleeved on the first pillar 624 . The transition piece 123 includes a second cylinder, a groove 1233 is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the second cylinder, and the second end 120 of the flexible member 401 is wrapped in the groove 1233. Wherein, the toggle protrusion 1231 is located on the outer circumferential surface of the transition piece 123 and protrudes along the radial direction of the transition piece 123, and the number of the toggle protrusion 1231 is at least one. In this embodiment, the number of the toggle protrusions 1231 is two, which are distributed at intervals along the circumference of the transition piece 123. When the transition piece 123 is driven to rotate by the flexible member 401, the toggle protrusions 1231 also rotate synchronously.

The rotation axis of the detected component 500 is perpendicular to the first direction and parallel to the rotation axis of the transition component 123 (that is, the rotation axis of the detected component 500 is also along the second direction). The second protective cover 620 is provided with a second pillar 625. The second pillar 625 extends along the second direction. In the first direction, the second pillar 625 is further away from the second end 120 of the box body 100 than the first pillar 624. Further, the component to be detected 500 is rotatably mounted on the second pillar 625 . The detected part 500 includes a second force-bearing end 5006 and a detected part 5007. The second force-receiving end 5006 and the detected part 5007 are respectively located on different sides of the rotation axis of the detected part 500. When the detected part 500 rotates, the second force-receiving end 5006 and the detected part 5007 have opposite motion trajectories. In the first direction, the second force-receiving end 5006 is closer to the box 100 than the detected part 5007. In a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the detected component 500 (the second direction), the projection of the second force-bearing end 5006 of the detected component 500 at least partially coincides with the projection of the motion trajectory of the toggle protrusion 1231 . When the transition piece 123 is driven to rotate by the flexible piece 401, the toggle protrusion 1231 contacts the second force-bearing end 5006 and pushes the detected part 500 to rotate, so that the detected part 5007 contacts the detection part of the image forming device.

Through the above arrangement, when the flexible member 401 moves relative to the box body 100, the flexible member 401 drives the transition piece 123 to rotate relative to the box body 100, and the toggle protrusion 1231 on the transition piece 123 moves the detected piece 500 so that the detected piece 500 moves relative to the box body 100. Box 100 movement.

In a possible implementation, as shown in Figure 195, Figure 200 and Figure 201, the other end of the flexible member 401 is provided with a second limiting block 4012, and the transition piece 123 is provided with a second limiting hole 1232. The other end of the member 401 passes through the second limiting hole 1232, and the second limiting block 4012 offsets the transition piece 123.

Among them, the second limiting block 4012 is fixedly installed on the other end of the flexible member 401, the second limiting hole 1232 is opened on the side wall of the groove 1233, and a second insertion opening 1234 is also provided on the side wall of the groove 1233. The second insertion opening 1234 is connected with the second limiting hole 1232, and the second insertion opening 1234 allows the flexible member 401 to pass through the second insertion opening 1234. And enters the second limiting hole 1232. The second insertion opening 1234 is smaller than the size of the second limiting hole 1232, and the size of the second limiting hole 1232 is smaller than the size of the second limiting block 4012. The above arrangement allows the flexible part 401 to not come out of the transition part 123 when the movement of the flexible part 401 drives the transition part 123 to rotate.

As shown in FIGS. 194 to 201 , the box body 100 is provided with a first guide groove 153 extending in the first direction, and the flexible member 401 is inserted into the first guide groove 153 .

Among them, the first guide groove 153 is provided on the surface of the fifth end 150 of the box body 100 (the surface in the C1 direction) through an integrated molding process. The extension direction of the first guide groove 153 is parallel to the first direction, and the first guide groove 153 passes through At the first end 110 and the second end 120 of the box body 100, the flexible member 401 is installed in the first guide groove 153 and can slide along the first guide groove 153. A fourth limiting protrusion 114 is provided on one end of the first guide groove 153 close to the first end 110. A fourth limiting hole 1141 is opened on the fourth limiting protrusion 114. The first end 110 of the flexible member 401 passes through the fourth limiting protrusion 114. Limiting hole 1141. A third limiting protrusion 1201 is provided on one end of the first guide groove 153 close to the second end 120. The third limiting protrusion 1201 has a third limiting hole 12011. The second end 120 of the flexible member 401 passes through the third limiting protrusion 1201. The limiting hole 12011 prevents the flexible member 401 from coming out of the first guide groove 153 .

By setting the first guide groove 153 to limit the position of the flexible member 401, the stability of the transmission of the flexible member 401 is ensured.

In some embodiments, the developing device may further include a fourth elastic member 760 (not shown). The fourth elastic member 760 is used to enable the detected component 500 to move without being subjected to the force of the transition component 123 . The component 500 is restored or maintained in the first state (the first state is a state in which the detected part 5007 is not in contact with the detecting component, that is, the detected component 500 is in a non-detecting position). The fourth elastic member 760 may be a torsion spring, a tension spring, a compression spring, or other components. Taking the torsion spring as an example, one end of the torsion spring is in contact with the component to be detected 500, and the other end is in contact with the second protective cover 620. When the second force-bearing end 5006 of the component to be detected 500 is rotated by the force of the toggle protrusion 1231, , the torsion spring undergoes elastic deformation, and after the toggle protrusion 1231 crosses the second force-bearing end 5006 (no force exerts any force on the second force-bearing end 5006), the elastic restoring force of the torsion spring returns the detected component 500 to the first state. In some other embodiments, the fourth elastic member 760 may not be provided, and the detected member 500 can be restored to the first state by the force (elastic force) of the detecting member of the image forming device.

The working process of the developing device provided in this embodiment may include the following processes:

The first rotating member 410 is driven by the stirring gear 310 to rotate, so that the first force applying part 4110 contacts the flexible member 401, because one end of the flexible member 401 is limited by the first limiting block 4011 and the first limiting hole 1111. , so the flexible part 401 is pulled and moved under the extrusion of the first force-applying part 4110, so that the other end of the flexible part 401 drives the transition piece 123 to rotate, so that the two toggle protrusions 1231 on the transition piece 123 successively interact with each other. Detected parts The second force-bearing end 5006 of the image forming device 500 contacts and applies force to the detected part 500, so that the detected part 500 rotates from a first state in which the detected part 5007 is not in contact with the detecting part in the image forming device to being in contact with the detecting part in the image forming device. The second state of contact is that the detected piece 500 rotates from the non-detection position to the detection position. Since two toggles are provided, when the first toggled protrusion 1231 contacts the second force-bearing end 5006 on the detected part 500, the detected part 500 moves from the first state to the second state, so that an image is formed. An electrical signal is generated in the device. When the first toggle protrusion 1231 is no longer in contact with the second force-bearing end 5006 of the detected component 500, under the action of the elastic restoring force of the fourth elastic member 760, the detected component 500 From the second state to the first state, the electrical signal in the image forming device disappears; then as the transition piece 123 continues to rotate, the second toggle protrusion 1231 contacts the second force-bearing end 5006 of the detected piece 500 , causing the detected part 500 to move from the first state to the second state again, causing a second electrical signal to be generated in the image forming device, and then the second toggle protrusion 1231 no longer contacts the detected part 500 , and the detected part 500 Under the action of the fourth elastic member 760, it returns to the first state again. At this time, the second electrical signal in the image forming device disappears. The image forming device can determine the developing device according to the number, duration, and generation time interval of the electrical signal. information (model, life, old and new, etc.).

When both toggle protrusions 1231 are in contact with the detected piece 500 , the flexible member 401 is pushed along the guide slope 1121 to the side of the locking protrusion 112 away from the first rotating member 410 (that is, the C2 direction of the locking protrusion 112 (one end) and is blocked by the locking protrusion 112, the flexible member 401 breaks away from the movement trajectory of the first force applying part 4110, preventing the flexible member 401 from moving again, thereby completing the detection process. At the same time, it can be ensured that when the tested developing device is installed into the image forming device again, the flexible member 401 cannot move again, so the image forming device cannot generate an electrical signal, so that the image forming device determines that the developing device is an old developing device.

Each toggle protrusion 1231 drives the detected part 5007 of the detected part 500 to contact the detection part once, causing the image forming device to generate an electrical signal. That is, the number of times of generating electrical signals is determined by the number of toggle protrusions 1231. Different models The developing device can be assembled with different numbers of toggle protrusions 1231, so that the image forming device can identify different developing devices according to different times of generating electrical signals.

In other embodiments, the detected piece 500 may not be provided, and the toggle protrusion 1231 on the transition piece 123 can directly toggle the detection piece in the image forming device to contact and cause displacement of the detection piece.

Example 23

As shown in Figures 202 to 209, the difference between this embodiment and the above-mentioned embodiment is that the structures of the transmission unit and the detected part 500 are different.

Illustratively, the transmission unit includes a first rotating member 410 and a transmission member. The first rotating member 410 is provided with a first transmission protrusion 417 . The transmission member includes a rotating rod 402 (the rotating rod 402 in this embodiment is also a swinging member) that is rotatably installed on the box body 100. The rotating axis of the rotating rod 402 extends along the first direction. The first transmission protrusion 417 is provided on the side of the first rotating member 410 facing the first end 110. The rotating rod 402 is provided with a first swing part 4021 at one end and a second swing part 4022 at the other end. The first swing part 4021 is provided with When in contact with the first transmission protrusion 417, the second swing portion 4022 is used to drive the detected component 500 to move relative to the box body 100. The position where the second swing part 4022 contacts the detected component 500 is located between the first end 110 and the second end 120 of the box 100 .

Among them, the cross-sectional shapes of the first swing part 4021 and the second swing part 4022 are both cam shapes, and the first swing part 4021 and the second swing part 4022 are both arranged on the circumferential surface of the rotating rod 402 along the diameter of the rotating rod 402 protruding.

The first rotating member 410 is rotatably mounted on the first end 110 , and the axial direction of the first rotating member 410 is parallel to the axial direction of the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 . The number of the first transmission protrusions 417 is multiple. The first transmission protrusions 417 are arranged at intervals on the side of the first rotating member 410 facing the first end 110 . It can be understood that the first transmission protrusions 417 rotate along with the first rotating member 410 . The transmission assembly is provided on the first end 110. The transmission assembly includes a driving gear 322 and a power receiving portion 321 provided on the driving gear 322. The power receiving portion 321 is used to receive external driving force. The rotating rod 402 is rotatably disposed at the fifth end 150 of the housing. The axis of the rotating rod 402 extends along the first direction, and the rotating rod 402 can rotate along its own axis.

Figures 205 and 206 show that the side of the first rotating member 410 away from the first transmission protrusion 417 is provided with a meshing section 4101 and a notch section 4102. The meshing section 4101 is provided along the circumferential direction. The transmission assembly also includes a stirring gear 310. The gear 310 is rotatably mounted on the first end 110. The stirring gear 310 is provided with a meshing portion 313. The meshing portion 313 meshes with the meshing segment 4101. The meshing portion 313 rotates with the stirring gear 310, and the meshing portion 313 meshes with the meshing segment 4101, thereby The first rotating member 410 is driven to rotate.

As shown in Figures 202 to 206, when the first swing portion 4021 contacts one of the first transmission protrusions 417, it will swing as the first transmission protrusion 417 rotates, and the second swing portion on the rotation rod 402 4022 drives the detected part 500 to move to the detection position. Exemplarily, the plurality of first transmission protrusions 417 include a first contact protrusion 417A, a second contact protrusion 417B, and a third contact protrusion 417C. The first contact protrusion 417A, the second contact protrusion 417B, The third contact protrusions 417C are all disposed on the side of the first rotating member 410 close to the first end 110 . The first contact protrusions 417A, the second contact protrusions 417B, and the third contact protrusions 417C are spaced along the circumferential direction of the first rotating member 410 distribution, the arc length of the first contact protrusion 417A is larger than the second contact protrusion 417B and the third contact protrusion 417C. When the first rotating member 410 rotates, the first contact protrusion 417A, the second contact protrusion 417B, and the third contact protrusion 417C sequentially drive the first swing part 4021 to swing, and the first swing part 4021 drives the rotating rod. 402 and the second swing part 4022 move, and the second swing part 4022 drives the detected piece 500 to move relative to the box body 100 . Since the first contact protrusion 417A, the second contact protrusion 417B, and the third contact protrusion 417C are arranged at intervals, the image forming device will generate multiple intervals of electrical signals. Since the arc length of the first contact protrusion 417A is longer than the second contact protrusion 417B and the third contact protrusion 417C. Therefore, when the first contact protrusion 417A contacts the first swing portion 4021, the detected piece 500 is in the detection position longer than the second contact protrusion 417B and the third contact protrusion 417C contact the first swing portion 4021. The time when the detected part 500 is in the detection position during contact. Therefore, the first contact protrusion 417A, the second contact protrusion 417B, and the third contact protrusion 417C with different arc lengths will cause the image forming device to generate electrical signals of different durations. From this, To distinguish between different types of developing devices, in other embodiments, different numbers of first transmission protrusions 417 may also be provided, for example, four, five or even more first transmission protrusions 417 may be provided, and first transmission protrusions 417 with different arc lengths may also be provided. A transmission protrusion 417 enables the image forming device to generate electrical signals of different durations, and can also make the intervals between different first transmission protrusions 417 different. By setting different numbers on the first rotating members 410 of different models of developing devices, different The arc length of the first transmission protrusion 417 can distinguish different types of developing devices.

As shown in Figures 202, 203, 204 and 209, a third elastic member 750 is set on the rotating rod 402, and a first protective cover 610 is installed on the first end 110. One end of the third elastic member 750 is connected to the first The swing part 4021 is connected, and the other end is connected to the first protective cover 610 . The rotating rod 402 compresses the third elastic member 750 when rotating, causing the third elastic member 750 to generate elastic potential energy. When the first rotating member 410 rotates until the first transmission protrusion 417 leaves the first swing part 4021, the third elastic member 750 recovers. In the original state, the elastic potential energy is converted into mechanical energy to reset the rotating rod 402. At this time, the electrical signal generated by the image forming device disappears. Through the generation and disappearance of the electrical signal, several segments of electrical signals are generated to distinguish different types of developing devices.

In this embodiment, when the transmission assembly drives the first rotating member 410 to rotate, the first transmission protrusion 417 on the first rotating member 410 interferes with the first swing portion 4021 on the rotating rod 402, causing the rotating rod 402 to move relative to the box. 100 rotates, and the second swing portion 4022 on the rotating rod 402 drives the detected piece 500 to move relative to the box body 100, so that the image forming device can obtain information about the developing device.

As shown in FIGS. 202 , 203 , 204 and 209 , the component to be detected 500 is slidably installed on the box 100 along the second direction, and part of the component to be detected 500 extends out of the second end 120 .

The object to be detected 500 is formed into a rod-shaped structure, and the axial direction of the rod-shaped structure is parallel to the axial direction of the developing roller 210 and the powder feeding roller 260 . One end of the detected part 500 away from the first end 110 extends out of the second end 120. When the detected part 500 is located at the detection position, the part of the detected part 500 extending out of the second end 120 pushes the detection part of the image forming device to form an image. The device generates electrical signals. Schematically, a fourth elastic member 760 is connected between the component to be detected 500 and the box 100. When the component to be detected 500 slides from the non-detection position to the detection position, the fourth elastic component 760 will stretch and generate elastic potential energy. . When the second swing portion 4022 separates from the detected piece 500, the fourth elastic member 760 releases elastic potential energy, and the elastic force of the fourth elastic member 760 drives the detected piece 500 to slide from the non-detection position to the detection position. As the first rotating member 410 rotates, another first transmission protrusion 417 on the first rotating member 410 continues to drive the first swing part 4021, the rotating rod 402 and the second swing part 4022 to move, thereby continuing to push the detected object. 500 movement, the detected object 500 reciprocates along the direction of the width of the developing device and the second direction. The direction of movement is perpendicular to the axis direction of the rotating rod 402. Therefore, the image forming device will generate several segments of electrical signals, which are distinguished by different electrical signals. Different models of developing devices.

The box 100 is provided with a guide 1506, and the detected part 500 is set on the guide 1506. The guide 1506 is arranged on both sides of the box 100. There is a hollow rectangular hole in the middle of the guide 1506. The two ends of the detected part 500 are respectively It is arranged in a rectangular hole, so that the detected part 500 moves along the rectangular hole, and the direction of movement is perpendicular to the axis direction of the rotating rod 402. The guide member 1506 has a guiding function. The detected part 500 is arranged on the guide member 1506 so that the detected part 500 Driven by the second swing part 4022 and the fourth elastic member 760, the reciprocating motion along the guide member 1506 ensures the moving direction of the detected part 500, thereby ensuring that the detected part 500 can stably push the detection part when it moves. to cause the image forming device to generate electrical signals.

With this structure, the object to be detected 500 can slide in the second direction between the detection position and the non-detection position relative to the box body 100.

In a possible implementation, a first acceleration part 4103 is provided on a side of the first rotating member 410 away from the first end 110 . The developing device also includes a second elastic member 770 disposed at the first end 110. One end of the second elastic member 770 offsets the first accelerating part 4103. The second elastic member 770 is used to disengage the transmission from the transmission assembly when the first rotating member 410 When the first rotating member 410 is driven to rotate.

Wherein, the first accelerating part 4103 is located on the side of the first rotating member 410 away from the first transmission protrusion 417 . For example, one end of the second elastic member 770 is in contact with the first accelerating part 4103, and the other end is in contact with the first protective cover 610. During the rotation process, the first rotating member 410 compresses the second elastic member 770 on the first accelerating part 4103, causing the second elastic member 770 to generate elastic potential energy. During this period, the first transmission protrusion 417 rotates with the first rotating member 410. The rotation rod 402 and the object to be detected 500 are moved to cause the image forming device to generate an electrical signal. The first contact protrusion 417A, the second contact protrusion 417B, and the third contact protrusion 417C sequentially contact the first swing portion 4021 at the first speed. Push the first swing part 4021 to push the detected part 500 to the detection position at the second speed, and push the detection part to cause the image forming device to generate an electrical signal, and then when the first rotating part 410 rotates to the notch section 4102, it is engaged The segment 4101 is disengaged from the meshing portion 313, and the first rotating member 410 can no longer receive power from the stirring gear 310, causing the second elastic member 770 to return to its original state, releasing elastic potential energy, and causing the first transmission protrusion 417 to drive the first transmission protrusion 417 at the third speed. The swing part 4021 moves, so that the detected part 500 moves to the detection position at the fourth speed and pushes the detection part so that the image forming device generates an electrical signal. The image forming device generates an electrical signal according to the moving speed of the detected part 500, the number of times the detection part is pushed, and The length of time it is maintained at the detection position generates different electrical signals, and the combination of different electrical signals corresponds to different developing devices, thereby distinguishing the developing devices. The meshing section 4101 is disengaged from the meshing portion 313 and will not be re-engaged thereafter. Therefore, it can also be determined whether the developing device has been used based on whether the electrical signal is generated.

In this structure, when the first rotating member 410 is out of mesh with the gear of the transmission assembly, the first rotating member 410 is driven to rotate in the reverse direction through the cooperation between the first accelerating part 4103 and the second elastic member 770, and then the first rotating member 410 drives the rotating rod 402 to rotate, and the rotating rod 402 drives the detected part 500 to move to the detection position, so that the image forming device continues to generate electrical signals to complete the detection process.

Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solution of the present application, but not to limit it; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that: The technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments can still be modified, or some or all of the technical features can be equivalently replaced; and these modifications or substitutions do not deviate from the essence of the corresponding technical solutions from the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application. scope.

Claims (64)

A developing device is characterized in that it includes: A box body, the box body has a first end and a second end that are oppositely arranged in the first direction, the box body has a third end and a fourth end that are oppositely arranged in the second direction, and the box body is in The third direction has a fifth end and a sixth end arranged oppositely, and the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are arranged to intersect with each other; The developing assembly includes a developing roller rotatably arranged in the box body, the developing roller is located at the third end of the box body, the axial direction of the developing roller extends along the first direction, and in the second direction The developing roller is located at the third end of the box body; a transmission assembly, disposed at the first end, the transmission assembly being configured to drive the developing assembly to move after receiving power output from the image forming device; Transmission unit. The transmission unit includes a first rotating member and a transmission member. The first rotating member is rotatably arranged at the first end of the box body. The first rotating member is connected to the transmission assembly and the transmission member respectively. The parts to be detected are drivingly connected to the transmission parts, and the detected parts are drivingly connected to the transmission parts; The detected part is at least partially located at the second end. The detected part is transmission connected with the transmission assembly through the transmission component. The detected part can move between a detection position and a non-detection position. The developing device according to claim 1, characterized in that the transmission member includes a translational member, the translational member is transmission-connected with the first rotating member and can be displaced relative to the box body in the first direction. , one end of the translational member is provided with a first driven part for receiving the power transmitted by the first rotating member. The developing device according to claim 2, wherein at least one of the first driven portion and the first rotating member is provided with a first transmission surface that is inclined relative to the first direction. The developing device according to claim 3, wherein the first driven part is provided with a spherical protrusion, and the spherical protrusion offsets the first rotating member. The developing device according to claim 2, wherein a positioning fitting part is provided on the first end, a first positioning part is provided on one end of the translation member, and the first positioning part extends into the Position the matching part to limit the rotation of the translation member. The developing device according to claim 5, wherein the first end of the box body is provided with a first protective cover, and the positioning fitting portion is provided on the first protective cover. The developing device according to claim 2, wherein one end of the first rotating member in contact with the first driven part is provided with a tapered portion, and the tapered portion offsets the translational member. The developing device according to claim 2, wherein in the first direction, the contact position between the first rotating member and the translating member is located in the middle of the box body. The developing device according to claim 2, wherein the translational member is a flexible member, and the flexible member is drivingly connected to the detected member and the first rotating member respectively. The developing device according to claim 9, wherein a first force applying part is provided on a side of the first rotating member toward the first end, and the first force applying part is used to rotate the When a rotating component rotates, it interferes with the flexible component to drive the flexible component to move. The developing device according to claim 10, wherein the projection of the flexible member in the first direction and the projection of the movement trajectory of the first force applying part in the first direction at least partially coincide. . The developing device according to claim 11, wherein a first limiting block is provided at one end of the flexible member, a limiting convex block is installed on the first end, and a third limiting convex block is provided on the limiting convex block. A limiting hole, the flexible member penetrates the first limiting hole, and the size of the first limiting block is larger than the size of the first limiting hole. The developing device according to claim 11, wherein a locking protrusion is provided on the first end, and a guide slope is provided at an end of the locking protrusion away from the first end, and the guide slope is configured to guide The flexible member crosses the locking protrusion. The developing device according to claim 9, wherein the detected component is rotatably mounted on the second end, a transition piece is rotatably mounted on the second end, and the rotation axis of the transition piece is perpendicular to the second end. In the first direction, the other end of the flexible member is wrapped around the transition piece, and a toggle protrusion for toggle the detected piece is protruded on the transition piece. The developing device according to claim 14, characterized in that the other end of the flexible member is provided with a second limiting block, the transition piece is provided with a second limiting hole, and the other end of the flexible member passes through Through the second limiting hole, the second limiting block offsets the transition piece. The developing device according to claim 9, wherein the box body is provided with a first guide groove extending along the first direction, and the flexible member is inserted into the first guide groove. The developing device according to claim 1, characterized in that the transmission member includes a swing member, the swing member is pivotally installed on the box body, and the swing member can be relative to the box body. Swing about the pivot axis. The developing device according to claim 17, wherein a portion of the swing member located between the pivot axis and the first rotating member is at least partially configured to be inclined to the first direction. The developing device according to claim 17, characterized in that the box body is provided with a first guide rail, and the swing member is provided with a swing member that cooperates with the first guide rail and moves along with the swing member. Guide protrusions that move together. The developing device according to claim 19, wherein the first guide track is in an arc shape. The developing device according to claim 17, wherein a receiving groove is provided at the fifth end of the box body, and the swing member is disposed in the receiving groove. The developing device according to claim 17, wherein the pivot axis of the swing member is parallel to the first direction, the swing member is provided with a first swing part and a second swing part, the first swing part is The second swing part is used to contact the first rotating member and receive the power provided by the first rotating member. The second swing part is used to drive the detected piece to move relative to the box body. The second swing part is in contact with the detected piece. The contact position is between the first end and the second end of the box body. The developing device according to any one of claims 17 to 21, wherein the pivot axis of the swing member intersects with the first direction. The developing device according to claim 1, wherein the first rotating member receives the power of the transmission assembly to rotate and displaces relative to the box body in the first direction, and the first end of the box body is provided with an abutment component, the first rotating component is provided with a first abutting protrusion for contacting the abutting component. The developing device according to claim 24, wherein at least one of the abutting member and the first abutting protrusion has a first driving surface intersecting the first direction. The developing device according to claim 25, wherein the contact member is further provided with a second driving surface, and the angle between the first driving surface and the first direction is different from the first driving surface. The angle between the two driving surfaces and the first direction, the first driving surface and the second driving surface are spaced apart in the rotation direction of the first rotating member. The developing device according to claim 26, wherein the contact member is provided with a first protruding part and a second protruding part, the first driving surface is provided on the first protruding part, and the second protruding part is The driving surface is provided on the second protrusion, and the first protrusion and the second protrusion have different lengths in the rotation direction of the first rotating member. The developing device according to claim 25, characterized in that the developing device further includes a first elastic member, one end of the first elastic member offsets the first rotating member, and the first elastic member is used to Driving station The first rotating component offsets the contact component. The developing device according to claim 28, wherein the first rotating member includes a plurality of coaxial and spaced apart cylinders, and the first support column passes through the innermost cylinder, so One end of the first elastic member extends between two adjacent barrels. The developing device according to claim 28, wherein the contact member is provided with a reset protrusion, the first rotating member is further provided with a second contact protrusion, and the reset protrusion is configured to be in contact with the first rotating member. The second contact protrusions are in contact with each other, and the reset protrusions provide the second contact protrusions with force to rotate the first rotating member. The developing device according to claim 25, wherein the transmission assembly further includes a third rotating member, the third rotating member is located outside the first rotating member and is slidingly connected to the first rotating member. , the third rotating member is drivingly connected to the transmission assembly. The developing device according to claim 31, wherein the first rotating member rotates with the rotation of the third rotating member and is displaceable in the first direction relative to the stirring gear. The developing device according to claim 32, wherein the third rotating member is a stirring gear, the developing assembly includes a stirring shaft, the stirring shaft is coaxial and transmission connected with the stirring gear, and the first rotating member The transmission member and the transmission member pass through the stirring shaft, and one end of the transmission member is connected to the first rotating member and the other end is drivingly connected to the detected piece. The developing device according to claim 24, wherein the first rotating member and the transmission member are integrally connected. The developing device according to claim 24, wherein the first rotating member is provided with an acceleration slope, the acceleration slope is provided on an end of the first rotating member close to the box body, and the first rotating member is provided with an acceleration slope. In the direction of rotation, the upstream side of the acceleration slope is closer to the first end of the box in the first direction than the downstream side. The developing device according to claim 24, wherein the first rotating member is provided with an identification portion, the first end of the box is provided with a first protective cover, and the first protective cover is provided with an exposed The hole position of the identification part. The developing device according to claim 1, wherein one end of the transmission member is in contact with the first rotating member, and at least one of the first rotating member and the transmission member is provided with a first rotating member. A first transmission surface with crossed directions, the first transmission surface is used for the transmission member to receive the power provided by the first rotating member and move relative to the box body. The developing device according to claim 37, wherein the transmission unit further includes a rotating The second rotating member is installed on the first end, the transmission assembly is transmission connected with the second rotating member, the second rotating member is transmission connected with the first rotating member, the transmission unit also includes a connection A linkage rod is provided between the first rotating element and the second rotating element. One end of the linkage rod is rotationally connected to the first rotating element, and the other end is rotationally connected to the second rotating element. The developing device according to claim 38, wherein the developing device further includes a first elastic member, one end of the first elastic member is connected to the first rotating member, and the first elastic member is configured To drive the first rotating member to rotate. The developing device according to claim 39, wherein the first rotating member is provided with a connecting column, the axis of the connecting column is on the same straight line as the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the first rotating member is provided with a connecting column. The elastic component is against the side wall of the connecting column. A pre-force block is protruding from the side wall of the connecting column. The pre-force block is configured to be against the first elastic component. The developing device according to claim 37, wherein the first rotating member is provided with a cylindrical section, and the first transmission surface is provided on the circumferential surface of the cylindrical section. The developing device according to claim 37, wherein the developing assembly includes a stirring shaft, the first rotating member is coaxially arranged with the stirring shaft, and the first rotating member is used to serve as the stirring shaft. To provide power, the first transmission surface is provided on a side of the first transmission member facing the first end. The developing device according to claim 1, wherein the transmission unit further includes a support member installed on the first end, the first rotating member is sleeved on the support member, and the first rotating member is At least one of the rotating member and the supporting member has a separation slope that intersects with the first direction, and the first rotating member and the supporting member are connected through the separation slope so that the first rotating member can To generate displacement relative to the box body in the first direction, the first rotating member is provided with a first transmission protrusion, and the first transmission protrusion is used to drive the transmission member to move relative to the box body. The developing device according to claim 43, wherein a threaded portion is provided on the outer circumferential surface of the support member, the separation slope is provided on the threaded portion, and the inner circumferential surface of the first rotating member A first protruding rib threadedly connected to the threaded portion is provided. The developing device according to claim 43, wherein the transmission assembly includes a stirring gear rotatably mounted on the first end, the developing assembly includes a stirring shaft rotatably mounted on the box, and the The stirring shaft is arranged through the support member, the stirring gear is located on the side of the first rotating member facing away from the first end and is fixedly connected to the stirring shaft, and the first rotating member faces away from the first end. There is a connecting rod protruding from one end of the end. The stirring gear is provided with a through opening for the connecting rod to extend into. The developing device according to claim 43, characterized in that the first transmission protrusion is a block-shaped structure protruding on the outer wall of the first rotating member, and the transmission member includes a pivotable As for the swinging member on the box body, the first transmission protrusion is configured to push one end of the swinging member to drive the swinging member to swing relative to the box body. The developing device according to claim 43, wherein the first transmission protrusion is an annular structure protruding on the outer wall of the first rotating member, the transmission member includes a translation member, and the translation member The moving member is capable of displacing relative to the box body in the first direction, and the first transmission protrusion is against one end of the translating member. The developing device according to claim 1, wherein the object to be detected is rotatable relative to the box body in a direction intersecting with the first direction, or is arranged at the second end of the box body or the object to be detected can be rotated along a direction intersecting with the first direction. The direction intersecting the first direction is slidably disposed relative to the box body at the second end of the box body. The developing device according to claim 48, wherein the end of the transmission member is provided with a pushing surface that is inclined to the first direction, and the pushing surface resists the detected component to drive the detected component. The detected part slides. The developing device according to claim 48, wherein the transmission unit further includes a pivoting member rotatably installed on the box body, one end of the pivoting member is connected to an end of the transmission member, The other end of the pivoting component is connected to the detected component. The developing device according to claim 50, wherein one end of the pivoting member is against the first rotating member, and the other end of the pivoting member is provided with a driving slope, and the driving slope is configured as The detected piece is pushed to slide relative to the box in a direction intersecting the first direction. The developing device according to claim 2, characterized in that a second protective cover is provided on the second end, the detected component is rotatably mounted on the second protective cover, and the transmission unit further includes a On the slide block at the other end of the transmission member, a push protrusion is provided on the slide block, and the push protrusion is configured to push the detected piece to rotate to the detection position. The developing device according to claim 1, wherein the developing device further includes a turning protrusion driven by the transmission member to displace relative to the box body in a first direction, and the turning protrusion is driven by the transmission member to displace relative to the box body. The detection member is driven by the steering protrusion to generate displacement in a direction crossing the first direction. The developing device according to claim 53, characterized in that the turning protrusion is provided at the second end of the box body, the detected component is provided with a first matching protrusion, the turning protrusion and the third a cooperation At least one of the protrusions has a third transmission surface inclined relative to the first direction, and the turning protrusion is used to push the first matching protrusion to drive the detected piece to slide. The developing device according to claim 53, wherein the detected member is slidably mounted on the second end, a driving member and a second matching protrusion are provided on the second end, and the steering protrusion is provided on On the driving member, the driving member is driven by the transmission member and can displace relative to the box body in the first direction, and the second matching protrusion is configured to push against the steering protrusion to drive the The driving member generates displacement in a direction intersecting the first direction, the driving member is configured to drive the detected member to slide relative to the box in a direction intersecting the first direction, and the steering member At least one of the protrusion and the second matching protrusion has a third transmission surface inclined relative to the first direction. The developing device according to claim 55, wherein the number of the second fitting protrusions is multiple, and the plurality of second fitting protrusions are arranged at intervals along the first direction, and the plurality of second fitting protrusions are The protrusions are located on the movement trajectory of the steering protrusion. The developing device according to claim 55, wherein a second protective cover and a first connecting member are provided on the second end, and the detected component is slidably mounted on the first connecting member, and the The translational member penetrates the first connecting member, and the second matching protrusion is provided on the second protective cover. The developing device according to claim 17, wherein the detected member is fixedly installed on an end of the swing member close to the second end in the first direction. The developing device according to claim 17, wherein the other end of the swing member is provided with a mounting groove, the detected component is slidably mounted on the box, and one end of the detected component extends into the The mounting groove is capable of swinging in the mounting groove, and there is a gap between the bottom of the mounting groove and the end of the detected piece. The developing device according to claim 59, wherein a limiting plate is provided on the component to be detected, and a second elastic element is provided between the bottom of the installation groove and an end of the component to be detected that extends into the installation groove. component, one end of the second elastic component is connected to the detected component, and the other end is connected to the swing component, and the second elastic component is used to drive the limiting plate against the box body. The developing device according to claim 59, wherein a limiting track is provided on the box body, a first limiting protrusion is provided on the detected component, and the first limiting protrusion extends into the limiting rail. In the positioning track, the first limiting protrusion is slidingly connected to the limiting track. The developing device according to claim 1, wherein the transmission member is connected to a third Elastic member, the third elastic member is configured to keep the transmission member in contact with the first rotating member. The developing device according to claim 1, wherein a limiting structure is provided on the box body, and the transmission member is limited to the limiting structure. The developing device according to claim 1, wherein the developing device further includes a fourth elastic member, the fourth elastic member is connected to the detected member, and the fourth elastic member is configured to drive The detected object moves to the non-detection position.